ANTIGUA FUNDING CORP
S-3, 1996-07-23
Previous: CENTURY BANCORP INC /NC, S-1, 1996-07-23
Next: ABRAMS INDUSTRIES INC, 10-K405, 1996-07-24



<PAGE>
     AS FILED WITH THE SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION ON JULY 23, 1996
 
                                                    REGISTRATION NO. 333-
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
                       SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION
                             WASHINGTON, D.C. 20549
                                   ---------
                                    FORM S-3
                             REGISTRATION STATEMENT
                                     UNDER
                           THE SECURITIES ACT OF 1933
                                 --------------
                   CAPITA EQUIPMENT RECEIVABLES TRUST 1996-1
                       (ISSUER WITH RESPECT TO THE NOTES)
             (Exact name of registrant as specified in its charter)
 
<TABLE>
<S>                                   <C>
             NEW YORK                      APPLIED FOR
  (State or other jurisdiction of       (I.R.S. Employer
  incorporation or organization)         Identification
                                             Number)
</TABLE>
 
                          ANTIGUA FUNDING CORPORATION
                (ORIGINATOR OF THE OWNER TRUST DESCRIBED HEREIN)
 
                               C/O CT CORPORATION
                               1209 ORANGE STREET
                           WILMINGTON, DELAWARE 19801
                                 (302) 658-7581
              (Address, including zip code, and telephone number,
       including area code, of registrant's principal executive offices)
 
                                 CT CORPORATION
                               1209 ORANGE STREET
                           WILMINGTON, DELAWARE 19801
                                 (302) 658-7581
           (Name, address, including zip code, and telephone number,
                   including area code, of agent for service)
                                ----------------
 
                                   COPIES TO:
 
<TABLE>
<S>                                       <C>
             OWEN C. MARX                          RICHARD M. SCHETMAN
         Dorsey & Whitney LLP                 Cadwalader, Wickersham & Taft
           250 Park Avenue                           100 Maiden Lane
       New York, New York 10177                  New York, New York 10038
            (212) 415-9285                            (212) 504-6906
</TABLE>
 
                                ----------------
 
        APPROXIMATE DATE OF COMMENCEMENT OF PROPOSED SALE TO THE PUBLIC:
AS SOON AS PRACTICABLE AFTER THE EFFECTIVE DATE OF THIS REGISTRATION STATEMENT.
                                ----------------
 
    If  the  only securities  being registered  on this  Form are  being offered
pursuant to dividend or interest reinvestment plans, please check the  following
box: / /
 
    If  any of the securities being registered on this Form are to be offered on
a delayed or continuous basis pursuant to  Rule 415 under the Securities Act  of
1933, check the following box: / /
 
    If  this Form  is filed  to register  additional securities  for an offering
pursuant to Rule 462(b) under the Securities Act, please check the following box
and list  the  Securities  Act  registration statement  number  of  the  earlier
effective registration statement for the same offering: / /
 
    If  this Form  is a post-effective  amendment filed pursuant  to Rule 462(c)
under the Securities Act,  check the following box  and list the Securities  Act
registration  statement number of the  earliest effective registration statement
for the same offering: / /
 
    If delivery of the prospectus is expected  to be made pursuant to Rule  434,
please check the following box: / /
                                ----------------
 
                        CALCULATION OF REGISTRATION FEE
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                  PROPOSED MAXIMUM
                                                                PROPOSED MAXIMUM     AGGREGATE
           TITLE OF EACH CLASS OF                AMOUNT TO       OFFERING PRICE       OFFERING         AMOUNT OF
        SECURITIES TO BE REGISTERED            BE REGISTERED      PER UNIT (1)       PRICE (1)      REGISTRATION FEE
<S>                                           <C>               <C>               <C>               <C>
 Receivable-Backed Notes....................     $1,000,000        $1,000,000        $1,000,000         $344.83
</TABLE>
 
(1) Estimated  solely  for  the  purposes of  calculating  the  registration fee
    pursuant to Rule 457.
                                ----------------
 
    THE REGISTRANT HEREBY  AMENDS THIS  REGISTRATION STATEMENT ON  SUCH DATE  OR
DATES AS MAY BE NECESSARY TO DELAY ITS EFFECTIVE DATE UNTIL THE REGISTRANT SHALL
FILE  A  FURTHER  AMENDMENT  WHICH SPECIFICALLY  STATES  THAT  THIS REGISTRATION
STATEMENT SHALL THEREAFTER BECOME EFFECTIVE  IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 8(A)  OF
THE  SECURITIES ACT  OF 1933  OR UNTIL  THE REGISTRATION  STATEMENT SHALL BECOME
EFFECTIVE ON SUCH DATE AS THE COMMISSION, ACTING PURSUANT TO SAID SECTION  8(A),
MAY DETERMINE.
 
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<PAGE>
                                EXPLANATORY NOTE
 
    This registration statement contains two forms of prospectus: one to be used
in  connection with an offering in the United States (the "U.S. Prospectus") and
one to be used  in connection with a  concurrent international offering  outside
the United States (the "International Prospectus"). The International Prospectus
is substantially the same as the U.S. Prospectus except for the front cover page
and  the  pages reflecting  the  "Underwriting" section.  The  form of  the U.S.
Prospectus is included herein  and is followed  by the pages to  be used in  the
International Prospectus which differ from those in the U.S. Prospectus. Each of
the  pages  for  the International  Prospectus  is labeled  "Alternate  Page for
International Prospectus." Each  of the  U.S. Prospectus  and the  International
Prospectus will be filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission pursuant to
Rule 424(b) under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended.
<PAGE>
INFORMATION   CONTAINED  HEREIN  IS  SUBJECT   TO  COMPLETION  OR  AMENDMENT.  A
REGISTRATION STATEMENT  RELATING TO  THESE SECURITIES  HAS BEEN  FILED WITH  THE
SECURITIES  AND EXCHANGE  COMMISSION. THESE SECURITIES  MAY NOT BE  SOLD NOR MAY
OFFERS TO BUY BE ACCEPTED PRIOR  TO THE TIME THE REGISTRATION STATEMENT  BECOMES
EFFECTIVE.  THIS  PROSPECTUS  SHALL  NOT  CONSTITUTE AN  OFFER  TO  SELL  OR THE
SOLICITATION OF AN OFFER TO BUY NOR SHALL THERE BE ANY SALE OF THESE  SECURITIES
IN  ANY STATE IN WHICH SUCH OFFER,  SOLICITATION OR SALE WOULD BE UNLAWFUL PRIOR
TO REGISTRATION OR QUALIFICATION UNDER THE SECURITIES LAWS OF ANY SUCH STATE.
<PAGE>
PROSPECTUS
                   SUBJECT TO COMPLETION, DATED JULY 23, 1996
                                  $
       CAPITA EQUIPMENT RECEIVABLES TRUST 1996-1 RECEIVABLE-BACKED NOTES
 
                $             % RECEIVABLE-BACKED NOTES, CLASS A
                $             % RECEIVABLE-BACKED NOTES, CLASS B
                $             % RECEIVABLE-BACKED NOTES, CLASS C
 
                          ANTIGUA FUNDING CORPORATION
                                   DEPOSITOR
 
                            AT&T CAPITAL CORPORATION
                                    SERVICER
 
    Capita Equipment Receivables Trust 1996-1 (the "Owner Trust") will be formed
pursuant to a Trust Agreement, dated as  of September   , 1996, between  Antigua
Funding  Corporation (the "Depositor"), which is to be a wholly owned subsidiary
of AT&T Capital Corporation  ("TCC") following the  consummation of the  Merger,
and                              , as  Owner Trustee (the  "Owner Trustee"). The
Receivable-Backed Notes (the "Notes") will be issued by the Owner Trust pursuant
to an Indenture, dated  as of September    , 1996, between  the Owner Trust  and
                    ,  as  Indenture  Trustee  (the  "Indenture  Trustee").  The
property of the Owner Trust (collectively, the "Trust Assets"), from the date of
issuance of the Notes (the "Closing Date") to the Merger Consummation Date, will
consist of the proceeds of the Notes and the Equity Certificates and  additional
cash  held (and invested in certain  Eligible Investments) in an Escrow Account,
which amounts will be sufficient to  redeem the Notes at the Special  Redemption
Price  on the  Special Redemption Date  if the  Merger is not  consummated on or
before September   , 1996.  The cash in the Escrow  Account will be used on  the
Merger   Consummation  Date  to  acquire  the  Contracts.  From  and  after  the
consummation of the Merger, it is expected that the Trust Assets will consist of
a pool of approximately           equipment leases, installment sale  contracts,
promissory  notes, loan and security agreements and similar types of receivables
(the "Contracts"), all Scheduled Payments  and Prepayments made by the  obligors
(the  "Obligors") on such Contracts on and  after the Cut-Off Date, the interest
of  the  Depositor  in  certain   equipment  related  to  such  Contracts   (the
"Equipment"), and amounts on deposit from time to time in the Collection Account
and  certain other  accounts described  herein. TCC  will service  the Contracts
pursuant to  a Transfer  and Servicing  Agreement, expected  to be  dated as  of
September     , 1996, among  the Depositor,  TCC, the Indenture  Trustee and the
Owner Trust. Of the Notes being offered, $          , $          and $
initial  principal amount of the Class A Notes, Class B Notes and Class C Notes,
respectively, are  being offered  initially in  the United  States by  the  U.S.
Underwriters  and $         , $          and $         , respectively, are being
offered initially outside the United  States by the International Managers.  The
Price to Public and Underwriting Discount will be identical for both offerings.
 
    The  Owner Trust will  also issue two classes  of certificates of beneficial
interest, the Equity Certificates and  the Equipment Certificate, which are  not
being  offered  hereby. The  Equipment Certificate  will represent  an undivided
interest in, and be payable solely  from, certain amounts derived from the  sale
or  other disposition of the Equipment  related to the Contracts that constitute
Lease Contracts upon expiration or  termination (including an early  termination
or  liquidation) of such Lease Contracts  and certain other amounts as described
herein. Amounts payable on the Equipment  Certificate will not be available  for
payment  of interest and principal on the  Notes. It is expected that the Equity
Certificates will  initially represent  the  right to  receive principal  in  an
amount  equal to  approximately 4% of  the Cut-Off Date  Contract Pool Principal
Balance, together with interest thereon at    % per annum.
 
    The Notes  and the  Equity Certificates  will be  payable solely  from,  and
secured  by,  the Amount  Available  on each  Payment  Date (which  will consist
primarily of the  Scheduled Payments  due under the  Contracts, certain  amounts
received  upon the  prepayment or  purchase of Contracts  or (to  the extent not
payable on  the Equipment  Certificate) liquidation  of the  related  Equipment,
investment  earnings on amounts deposited  in the Collection Account established
pursuant to the Indenture and amounts permitted to be withdrawn therefor from  a
Cash  Collateral  Account, in  each  case subject  to  prior application  to pay
certain fees  and expenses)  in  the order  of  priority described  herein.  The
likelihood of payment of interest on each Class of Notes will be enhanced by the
application of the Amount Available to the payment of such interest prior to the
payment  of principal on any of the Notes or the Equity Certificates, as well as
by the preferential right of the Holders of Notes of each such Class to  receive
such  interest (1) in the case of the Class A Notes, prior to the payment of any
interest on the Class B Notes, the Class C Notes or the Equity Certificates, (2)
in the case of the Class  B Notes, prior to the  payment of any interest on  the
Class  C Notes or  the Equity Certificates, and  (3) in the case  of the Class C
Notes, prior  to  the  payment  of any  interest  on  the  Equity  Certificates.
Likewise,  the likelihood of payment of principal on each Class of Notes will be
enhanced by the preferential right of the Holders of Notes of each such Class to
receive such principal, to the extent  of the Amount Available after payment  of
interest  on the Notes and the Equity Certificates as aforesaid, (i) in the case
of the Class  A Notes,  prior to the  payment of  any principal on  the Class  B
Notes,   the  Class  C  Notes  or   (except  as  described  herein)  the  Equity
Certificates, (ii) in the case of the Class B Notes, prior to the payment of any
principal on  the Class  C Notes  or  (except as  described herein)  the  Equity
Certificates, and (iii) in the case of the Class C Note, prior to the payment of
any  principal  on  the Equity  Certificates,  except as  described  herein. See
"Description of the Notes."
 
    To the extent the Amount Available  is sufficient therefor, interest at  the
rate  per annum noted above for  each of the Class A,  Class B and Class C Notes
(the applicable "Interest Rate") will be paid to Holders of each Class of Notes,
and principal will be  paid on the applicable  Class of Notes, on  the   day  of
each  month (or,  if such  day is  not a  Business Day,  on the  next succeeding
Business Day), commencing                 , 1996  (each, a "Payment Date").  The
Stated  Maturity Date for the Class  A Notes, the Class B  Notes and the Class C
Notes is              ,              , and              , respectively.
 
    The Notes are subject to  redemption as described herein under  "Description
of the Notes -- Special Redemption" and "-- Optional Purchase of Contracts."
 
    There  is  currently no  secondary  market for  the  Notes and  there  is no
assurance that one will develop. The  U.S. Underwriters expect, but will not  be
obligated, to make a market in the Notes in the United States. The International
Managers  expect,  but will  not be  obligated, to  make a  market in  the Notes
outside the United States.  There is no assurance  that either such market  will
develop, or if either such market does develop, that such market will continue.
 
    It  is a condition of  issuance of the Notes that  each of Standard & Poor's
Ratings Services, Moody's Investors Service,  Inc., Duff & Phelps Credit  Rating
Co.  and Fitch Investors Service, L.P. (i) rate the Class A Notes in its highest
rating category, (ii) rate the Class B Notes "       ," "       ," "       " and
"       ," respectively, and (iii) rate the Class C Notes "       ," "        ,"
"       " and "       ," respectively. See "Ratings of the Notes."
 
    FOR A DISCUSSION OF CERTAIN FACTORS RELATING TO THIS OFFERING, SEE "RISK
                          FACTORS" ON PAGE 18 HEREIN.
                                ----------------
 
    THE  NOTES  WILL  REPRESENT OBLIGATIONS  OF  THE  OWNER TRUST  AND  WILL NOT
REPRESENT INTERESTS  IN  OR OBLIGATIONS  OF  ANTIGUA FUNDING  CORPORATION,  AT&T
CAPITAL CORPORATION OR ANY OF THEIR RESPECTIVE AFFILIATES.
 
THESE  SECURITIES HAVE  NOT BEEN APPROVED  OR DISAPPROVED BY  THE SECURITIES AND
EXCHANGE COMMISSION OR ANY STATE SECURITIES COMMISSION, NOR HAS THE SECURITIES
  AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION OR ANY STATE SECURITIES COMMISSION PASSED UPON THE
    ACCURACY OR ADEQUACY  OF THIS  PROSPECTUS. ANY  REPRESENTATION TO  THE
      CONTRARY IS A CRIMINAL OFFENSE.
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                PRICE TO                    UNDERWRITING                  PROCEEDS TO
                                               PUBLIC (1)                   DISCOUNT (2)              THE DEPOSITOR (1)(3)
                                      ----------------------------  ----------------------------  ----------------------------
<S>                                   <C>                           <C>                           <C>
Per Class A Note....................               %                             %                             %
Per Class B Note....................               %                             %                             %
Per Class C Note....................               %                             %                             %
Total...............................               $                             $                             $
</TABLE>
 
- --------------------
(1) Plus  accrued  interest,  if  any, at  the  applicable  Interest  Rate, from
                 , 1996.
(2) The Depositor has agreed to indemnify the U.S. Underwriters against  certain
    liabilities,  including liabilities  under the  Securities Act  of 1933. See
    "Underwriting."
(3) Before  deducting  expenses  payable  by  the  Depositor,  estimated  to  be
    $         .
 
                              GLOBAL COORDINATORS:
NOMURA INTERNATIONAL                                        GOLDMAN, SACHS & CO.
 
    The  Notes are offered by the U.S.  Underwriters subject to prior sale when,
as and if issued to and accepted  by the U.S. Underwriters, subject to  approval
of  certain  legal matters  by counsel  and certain  other conditions.  The U.S.
Underwriters reserve the right to withdraw,  cancel or modify such offer and  to
reject  orders  in whole  or in  part. It  is  expected that  the Notes  will be
delivered in  book-entry  form on  or  about September     ,  1996  through  the
facilities  of The  Depository Trust Company,  Cedel Bank,  societe anonyme, and
Morgan Guaranty Trust Company of New  York, Brussels Office, as operator of  the
Euroclear System, against payment therefor in immediately available funds.
 
    Application  has  been  made  to  list the  Notes  on  the  Luxembourg Stock
Exchange.
 
                              GOLDMAN, SACHS & CO.
                                  -----------
 
               THE DATE OF THIS PROSPECTUS IS SEPTEMBER   , 1996
<PAGE>
    IN CONNECTION WITH THIS OFFERING, THE U.S. UNDERWRITERS AND/OR INTERNATIONAL
MANAGERS MAY OVER-ALLOT OR EFFECT  TRANSACTIONS WHICH STABILIZE OR MAINTAIN  THE
MARKET PRICE OF THE NOTES AT LEVELS ABOVE THOSE WHICH MIGHT OTHERWISE PREVAIL IN
THE  OPEN MARKET.  SUCH STABILIZING,  IF COMMENCED,  MAY BE  DISCONTINUED AT ANY
TIME.
 
    No dealer,  salesman  or  other  person has  been  authorized  to  give  any
information  or to make any representation not contained in this Prospectus and,
if given or made, such information or representation must not be relied upon  as
having been authorized by the Depositor, the Servicer, the Owner Trust, the U.S.
Underwriters  or the International Managers. This Prospectus does not constitute
an offer to  sell or a  solicitation of an  offer to buy  any of the  securities
offered  hereby in any jurisdiction to any person to whom it is unlawful to make
such offer or solicitation  in such jurisdiction. Neither  the delivery of  this
Prospectus,  nor any sale made hereunder, shall, under any circumstances, create
any implication that the information herein is correct as of any time subsequent
to the date hereof.
 
    Until             , 1996  (90 days after the  date of this Prospectus),  all
dealers  effecting transactions  in the Notes,  whether or  not participating in
this distribution, may be required to deliver a Prospectus. This is in  addition
to the obligation of dealers to deliver a Prospectus when acting as Underwriters
and with respect to their unsold allotments or subscriptions.
 
    Upon  receipt of  a request  by an investor  who has  received an electronic
Prospectus from any Underwriter or  a request by such investor's  representative
within  the period during which there is  an obligation to deliver a Prospectus,
such Underwriter  will  promptly deliver,  or  cause to  be  delivered,  without
charge, to such investor a paper copy of the Prospectus.
 
    The  Notes may not be offered or sold  in the United Kingdom by means of any
document except in circumstances which do not constitute an offer to the  public
within  the meaning  of the  Public Offers  of Securities  Regulations 1995. All
applicable provisions of the Financial Services  Act 1986 must be complied  with
in  connection with anything done in relation to the Notes in, from or otherwise
involving the United Kingdom. See "Underwriting."
<PAGE>
                           INCORPORATION BY REFERENCE
 
    All documents filed by the Servicer, on behalf of the Owner Trust,  pursuant
to  Section 13(a), 13(c), 14 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as
amended (the "Exchange Act"), after the date of this Prospectus and prior to the
termination of the offering of the Notes  shall be deemed to be incorporated  by
reference  into this Prospectus and to be a  part hereof from the date of filing
of such documents.
 
    The Depositor will provide without charge to  each person to whom a copy  of
this  Prospectus is delivered, on the written  or oral request of such person, a
copy of any or all of the documents incorporated herein by reference, except the
exhibits to  such documents.  Requests for  such copies  should be  directed  to
Antigua  Funding Corporation,  1209 Orange  Street, Wilmington,  Delaware 19801,
Attention: Secretary.
 
                             AVAILABLE INFORMATION
 
    The  Depositor,  as  the  originator  of  the  Owner  Trust,  has  filed   a
Registration  Statement  under  the  Securities Act  of  1933,  as  amended (the
"Securities  Act"),   with  the   Securities   and  Exchange   Commission   (the
"Commission")  on behalf of  the Owner Trust  with respect to  the Notes offered
pursuant to this Prospectus. For further  information, reference is made to  the
Registration Statement and amendments thereof and to the exhibits thereto, which
are  available for inspection without charge  at the public reference facilities
maintained by the Commission at 450 Fifth Street, N.W., Washington, D.C.  20549;
7 World Trade Center, 13th Floor, New York, New York 10048; and Northwest Atrium
Center,  500 Madison Street, Chicago, Illinois 60661. Copies of the Registration
Statement and amendments thereof and exhibits  thereto may be obtained from  the
Public  Reference Section of the Commission, 450 Fifth Street, N.W., Washington,
D.C. 20549 at prescribed rates. The  Commission also maintains a World Wide  Web
site  which provides on-line access to reports, proxy and information statements
and other information  regarding registrants that  file electronically with  the
Commission at the address "http://www.sec.gov."
 
                             REPORTS TO NOTEHOLDERS
 
    Unless  and  until Definitive  Notes are  issued, monthly  unaudited reports
containing information concerning the Owner Trust, and prepared by the Servicer,
will be sent by the Indenture Trustee on behalf of the Owner Trust only to  Cede
&  Co., as nominee of The Depository Trust Company ("DTC") and registered holder
of the Notes, and  to the Paying  Agent in Luxembourg.  See "Description of  the
Notes  -- Book-Entry Registration."  Such reports will  not constitute financial
statements prepared in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles.
See "Description  of  the  Notes  --  Reports  to  Noteholders"  for  additional
information  concerning periodic reports to Noteholders. Note Owners may receive
such reports, upon  written request to  the Indenture Trustee,  together with  a
certification  that they are Note Owners, and payment of any expenses associated
with the distribution of such  reports. Any such request  should be made to  the
Indenture  Trustee at the following  address:
            . Neither TCC nor the Depositor intends to send any of its financial
reports to Note Owners. The  Servicer, on behalf of  the Owner Trust, will  file
with  the Commission periodic  reports concerning the Owner  Trust to the extent
required under the Exchange Act, and the rules and regulations of the Commission
thereunder.
 
                                       i
<PAGE>
                               TABLE OF CONTENTS
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
SECTION                                                                                                       PAGE
- ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  ---------
<S>                                                                                                         <C>
INCORPORATION BY REFERENCE................................................................................          i
AVAILABLE INFORMATION.....................................................................................          i
REPORTS TO NOTEHOLDERS....................................................................................          i
PROSPECTUS SUMMARY........................................................................................          1
RISK FACTORS..............................................................................................         15
  Limited Liquidity.......................................................................................         15
  Subordination; Limited Assets...........................................................................         15
  Yield and Prepayment Considerations.....................................................................         15
  Bankruptcy or Insolvency Risks..........................................................................         16
  Certain Legal Aspects...................................................................................         17
  No Gross-Up for Withholding Tax.........................................................................         18
THE MERGER................................................................................................         18
THE DEPOSITOR AND THE OWNER TRUST.........................................................................         19
  The Depositor...........................................................................................         19
  The Owner Trust.........................................................................................         20
  Capitalization of the Owner Trust.......................................................................
  The Owner Trustee.......................................................................................
  AT&T CAPITAL CORPORATION................................................................................         21
THE ORIGINATORS...........................................................................................         22
  AT&T Capital Leasing Services, Inc......................................................................         22
  AT&T Credit Corporation and NCR Credit Corp.............................................................         23
  AT&T Commercial Finance Corporation.....................................................................         23
  Underwriting and Servicing..............................................................................         24
THE CONTRACTS.............................................................................................         27
  Description of the Contracts............................................................................         27
  Representations and Warranties Made by TCC..............................................................         30
  Certain Statistics Relating to the Initial Contract Pool................................................         33
  Certain Statistics Relating to Delinquencies and Defaults...............................................         35
DESCRIPTION OF THE NOTES..................................................................................         37
  General.................................................................................................         37
  Distributions...........................................................................................         37
  Class A Interest........................................................................................         38
  Class B Interest........................................................................................         38
  Class C Interest........................................................................................         39
  Principal...............................................................................................         39
  Special Redemption of the Notes.........................................................................         40
  Subordination of Class B and Class C Notes and Equity Certificates......................................         40
  Cash Collateral Account.................................................................................         41
  Contract Defaults.......................................................................................
  Optional Purchase of Contracts..........................................................................         41
  Trust Accounts..........................................................................................         41
  Reports to Noteholders..................................................................................         42
  Book-Entry Registration.................................................................................         43
  Definitive Notes........................................................................................         46
  Modification of Indenture Without Noteholder Consent....................................................         46
  Modification of Indenture With Noteholder Consent.......................................................         47
  Events of Default; Rights Upon Event of Default.........................................................         47
</TABLE>
 
                                       ii
<PAGE>
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
SECTION                                                                                                       PAGE
- ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  ---------
<S>                                                                                                         <C>
  Certain Covenants.......................................................................................         48
  Annual Compliance Statement.............................................................................         49
  Indenture Trustee's Annual Report.......................................................................         49
  Satisfaction and Discharge of Indenture.................................................................         49
  The Indenture Trustee...................................................................................         49
DESCRIPTION OF THE TRANSFER AND SERVICING AGREEMENT.......................................................         50
  Transfer and Assignment of Contracts and Equipment......................................................         50
  Collections on Contracts................................................................................         50
  Servicing...............................................................................................         51
  Amendment...............................................................................................         53
  Termination of the Agreement............................................................................         53
  The Owner Trustee.......................................................................................         54
CERTAIN LEGAL ASPECTS OF THE CONTRACTS....................................................................         54
  Enforcement of Security Interests in the Equipment......................................................         55
  Insolvency Matters......................................................................................         56
UNITED STATES TAXATION....................................................................................         58
  Treatment of the Notes..................................................................................         58
  Treatment of the Owner Trust............................................................................         58
  Payments of Interest....................................................................................         58
  Original Issue Discount.................................................................................         59
  Market Discount.........................................................................................         59
  Amortizable Bond Premium................................................................................         59
  Sale, Exchange or Retirement of Notes...................................................................         60
  Tax Consequences to United States Alien Holders.........................................................         60
  Backup Withholding......................................................................................         61
ERISA CONSIDERATIONS......................................................................................         63
RATINGS OF THE NOTES......................................................................................         63
USE OF PROCEEDS...........................................................................................         64
UNDERWRITING..............................................................................................         65
LEGAL MATTERS.............................................................................................         67
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION....................................................................................         67
GLOSSARY..................................................................................................         68
APPENDIX A:
GLOBAL CLEARANCE, SETTLEMENT AND TAX DOCUMENTATION PROCEDURES.............................................        A-1
  Initial Settlement......................................................................................        A-1
  Secondary Market Trading................................................................................        A-1
CERTAIN U.S. FEDERAL INCOME TAX DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS................................................        A-3
</TABLE>
 
                                      iii
<PAGE>
                               PROSPECTUS SUMMARY
 
    The  following  summary is  qualified in  its entirety  by reference  to the
detailed information appearing elsewhere in this Prospectus. Certain capitalized
terms used in this Prospectus Summary are defined elsewhere in this  Prospectus.
Some such terms are defined in the "Glossary."
 
<TABLE>
<S>                   <C>
ISSUER..............  A trust, referred to as the "Capita Equipment
                      Receivables Trust 1996-1" (the "Owner Trust"), will be
                      formed by the Depositor pursuant to a Trust Agreement
                      (the "Trust Agreement"), dated as of September , 1996,
                      among the Depositor and                         , as
                      Owner Trustee. See "The Depositor and the Owner Trust --
                      The Owner Trust."
 
INDENTURE TRUSTEE...  , in its capacity as trustee under an Indenture, dated
                      as of September , 1996, between the Owner Trust and the
                      Indenture Trustee (the "Indenture").
 
THE NOTES...........  The Owner Trust will issue $      aggregate principal
                      amount of   % Receivable-Backed Notes, Class A (the
                      "Class A Notes"), $   aggregate principal amount of    %
                      Receivable-Backed Notes, Class B (the "Class B Notes"),
                      and $      aggregate principal amount of    %
                      Receivable-Backed Notes, Class C (the "Class C Notes")
                      (collectively, the "Notes"), pursuant to the Indenture.
                      The Owner Trust will also issue the Equity Certificates
                      and the Equipment Certificate (collectively, the
                      "Certificates") to the Depositor. The Certificates are
                      not being offered hereby. The Notes and the Certificates
                      are collectively referred to as the "Securities."
 
INTEREST............  Interest on the outstanding principal amount of the
                      Notes of each Class will accrue at the interest rate for
                      such Class specified on the cover page of this
                      Prospectus (the "Interest Rate" for such Class) from and
                      including September   , 1996, to but excluding
                      October  , 1996 (in the case of the first interest
                      period), and thereafter from and including the most
                      recent Payment Date on which interest has been paid, to
                      but excluding the following Payment Date. To the extent
                      the Amount Available is sufficient therefor, the amount
                      of interest to be paid on the Notes on each Payment Date
                      will equal 30 days' interest (or, in the case of the
                      first interest period, interest accrued from and
                      including the September 1, 1996 to but excluding
                      October  , 1996). See "Description of the Notes."
</TABLE>
 
                                       1
<PAGE>
 
<TABLE>
<S>                   <C>
PRINCIPAL...........  To the extent the Amount Available is sufficient
                      therefor after payment of interest on the Notes and the
                      Equity Certificates, the aggregate amount of principal
                      to be paid on the Notes on each Payment Date will equal
                      the Monthly Principal Amount. Principal payable on the
                      Notes will be paid in respect of the Class A Notes on
                      each Payment Date until the Class A Principal Balance
                      has been reduced to zero, then in respect of principal
                      on the Class B Notes until the Class B Principal Balance
                      has been reduced to zero, and then in respect of
                      principal on the Class C Notes until the Class C
                      Principal Balance has been reduced to zero. Commencing
                      on the first Payment Date, however, a portion of the
                      Monthly Principal Amount will be payable on the Equity
                      Certificates until the aggregate amount so paid equals
                      $      .
 
                      The "Monthly Principal Amount" for any Payment Date will
                      equal:
 
                        (i) the difference between (a) the aggregate of the
                        Contract Principal Balances of the Contracts (the
                        "Contract Pool Principal Balance") as of the last day
                        of the second preceding calendar month, and (b) the
                        Contract Pool Principal Balance as of the last day of
                        the immediately preceding calendar month (or, in the
                        case of the first Payment Date, the Cut-Off Date
                        Contract Pool Principal Balance), plus
 
                        (ii) any portion of the Monthly Principal Amount for
                        the prior Payment Date not distributed in respect of
                        principal on the Notes or the Equity Certificates, as
                        appropriate, on such prior Payment Date.
 
                      The "Contract Principal Balance" of any Contract as of
                      the last day of any calendar month is:
 
                        (1) in the case of a Lease Contract, the present value
                        of the unpaid Scheduled Payments due on such Lease
                        Contract after such last day of the calendar month,
                        discounted monthly at the rate of   % per annum; and
 
                        (2) in the case of a Loan Contract, the outstanding
                        principal balance of such Loan Contract after giving
                        effect to Scheduled Payments due on or prior to such
                        last day of the calendar month, whether or not paid.
</TABLE>
 
                                       2
<PAGE>
 
<TABLE>
<S>                   <C>
                      The Contract Principal Balance of any Contract which,
                      during a calendar month, became a Liquidated Contract or
                      was purchased by TCC due to a breach of representations
                      and warranties, will be deemed to be zero on and after
                      the last day of such calendar month. A "Liquidated
                      Contract" is any Contract (a) with respect to which the
                      Servicer has repossessed and disposed of the related
                      Equipment, or otherwise collected all proceeds which, in
                      the Servicer's judgment, can be collected under such
                      Contract, or (b) which is delinquent 180 days or more.
                      See "Description of the Notes -- Principal."
 
STATED MATURITY
 DATES..............  If and to the extent not previously paid, the
                      outstanding principal amount of each Class of Notes will
                      be payable on the Stated Maturity Date of such Class.
                      The Class A Stated Maturity Date will be
                                              ,                         ; the
                      Class B Stated Maturity Date will be
                                              ,                         ; and
                      the Class C Stated Maturity Date will be
                                              ,                         .
 
FORM AND
 DENOMINATION.......  The Notes will be issued in book-entry form in
                      denominations of $1,000 and integral multiples thereof.
 
CLOSING DATE........  On or about September   , 1996.
 
CUT-OFF DATE........  September 1, 1996.
 
PAYMENT DATES AND
 RECORD DATES.......  Interest and principal on the Notes will be paid on the
                        day of each month (or, if such   day is not a Business
                      Day, the next succeeding Business Day), commencing in
                      October 1996, to Holders of record on the Business Day
                      immediately preceding such Payment Date (so long as the
                      Notes are held in book-entry form), or to Holders of
                      record on the last day of the preceding calendar month
                      (if Definitive Notes have been issued).
</TABLE>
 
                                       3
<PAGE>
 
<TABLE>
<S>                   <C>
SUBORDINATION.......  The likelihood of payment of interest on each Class of
                      Notes will be enhanced by the application of the Amount
                      Available to the payment of such interest prior to the
                      payment of principal on any of the Notes or the Equity
                      Certificates, as well as by the preferential right of
                      the Holders of Notes of each such Class to receive such
                      interest (1) in the case of the Class A Notes, prior to
                      the payment of any interest on the Class B Notes, the
                      Class C Notes or the Equity Certificates, (2) in the
                      case of the Class B Notes, prior to the payment of any
                      interest on the Class C Notes or the Equity
                      Certificates, and (3) in the case of the Class C Notes,
                      prior to the payment of any interest on the Equity
                      Certificates. Likewise, the likelihood of payment of
                      principal on each Class of Notes will be enhanced by the
                      preferential right of the Holders of Notes of each such
                      Class to receive such principal, to the extent of the
                      Amount Available after payment of interest on the Notes
                      and the Equity Certificates as aforesaid, (i) in the
                      case of the Class A Notes, prior to the payment of any
                      principal on the Class B Notes, the Class C Notes or
                      (except as described herein) the Equity Certificates;
                      (ii) in the case of the Class B Notes, prior to the
                      payment of any principal on the Class C Notes or (except
                      as described herein) the Equity Certificates; and (iii)
                      in the case of the Class C Notes, prior to the payment
                      of any principal on the Equity Certificates, except as
                      described herein. See "Description of the Notes."
 
RATINGS.............  It is a condition of issuance of the Notes that each of
                      Moody's Investors Service, Inc. ("Moody's"), Standard &
                      Poor's Ratings Services ("S&P"), Fitch Investors Service
                      L.P. ("Fitch") and Duff and Phelps Rating Service ("Duff
                      & Phelps" and, together with Moody's, S&P and Fitch, the
                      "Rating Agencies") rate (i) the Class A Notes in its
                      highest rating category, (ii) the Class B Notes
                      "                        ," "                        ,"
                      "                        " and
                      "                        ," respectively, and (iii) the
                      Class C Notes "                        ,"
                      "                        ," "                        "
                      and "                        ," respectively. A rating
                      is not a recommendation to buy, sell or hold securities
                      and may be subject to revision or withdrawal at any time
                      by the assigning Rating Agency. See "Ratings of the
                      Notes."
 
USE OF PROCEEDS.....  The proceeds from the offering and sale of the Notes and
                      the issuance of the Equity Certificates will be used by
                      the Depositor to acquire the Contracts and the
                      Originators' interest in the Equipment and to pay
                      expenses payable by the Depositor in connection with the
                      issuance of the Notes and the Equity Certificates.
</TABLE>
 
                                       4
<PAGE>
 
<TABLE>
<S>                   <C>
THE MERGER..........  It is expected that TCC will be merged with Antigua
                      Acquisition Corporation, a wholly owned subsidiary of
                      Hercules Limited, on the Merger Consummation Date. On
                      the Merger Consummation Date, the Depositor will deposit
                      the Contracts and other Trust Assets with the Indenture
                      Trustee, on behalf of the Owner Trust, and the proceeds
                      of the Escrow Account (which will include the proceeds
                      of the Notes and the Equity Certificates) will be
                      released to, or upon the order of, the Depositor. See
                      "Use of Proceeds" above. If the Merger is not
                      consummated, or the Servicer has not executed the
                      Transfer and Servicing Agreement, by September   , 1996,
                      all of the Notes will be redeemed at the Special
                      Redemption Price on the Special Redemption Date. See
                      "Special Redemption" below. Consummation of the Merger
                      is subject to certain regulatory approvals and other
                      preconditions. See "The Merger."
 
MERGER CONSUMMATION
 DATE...............  The date on which the Merger is consummated, currently
                      anticipated to be September 17, 1996.
 
DEPOSITOR...........  Antigua Funding Corporation (the "Depositor"), which
                      will be a wholly owned subsidiary of AT&T Capital
                      Corporation ("TCC") following the consummation of the
                      Merger. The Depositor is expected to acquire the
                      Contracts on the Merger Consummation Date pursuant to a
                      Transfer Agreement, expected to be dated as of September
                          , 1996 (the "Transfer Agreement"), among the
                      Depositor, TCC and the Originators, and will thereupon
                      transfer the Contracts to the Owner Trust pursuant to a
                      Transfer and Servicing Agreement (the "Transfer and
                      Servicing Agreement"), expected to be dated as of
                      September   , 1996, among the Depositor, TCC, as
                      Servicer, the Indenture Trustee and the Owner Trust. See
                      "The Depositor and the Owner Trust -- The Depositor."
 
SERVICER............  TCC will, pursuant to the Transfer and Servicing
                      Agreement, act as Servicer of the Contracts following
                      their transfer. See "Description of the Transfer and
                      Servicing Agreement -- Servicing." TCC is a
                      full-service, diversified equipment leasing and finance
                      company that operates principally in the United States.
</TABLE>
 
                                       5
<PAGE>
 
<TABLE>
<S>                   <C>
TRUST ASSETS........  From the Closing Date until the Merger Consummation
                      Date, the Trust Assets will consist solely of the
                      proceeds of the issuance of the Notes and the Equity
                      Certificates and additional cash held (and invested in
                      certain Eligible Investments) in an Escrow Account held
                      by the Indenture Trustee, which cash will be sufficient
                      to redeem all of the Notes at the Special Redemption
                      Price and the Equity Certificates on the Special
                      Redemption Date if the Merger is not consummated, or the
                      Servicer has not executed the Transfer and Servicing
                      Agreement, by September   , 1996. See "Description of
                      the Notes -- Special Redemption of the Notes." The
                      proceeds of the issuance of the Notes and the Equity
                      Certificates will be used as described under "Use of
                      Proceeds" above.
 
                      The Trust Assets, from and after the Merger Consummation
                      Date, will consist of:
 
                        (i) a pool of approximately     equipment lease
                        contracts (each, a "Lease Contract") and installment
                        sale contracts, promissory notes, loan and security
                        agreements and other similar types of receivables
                        (each, a "Loan Contract") (all such Lease Contracts
                        and Loan Contracts referred to herein as the
                        "Contracts") with various lessees, borrowers or other
                        obligors thereunder (each, an "Obligor"), including
                        the right to receive all Scheduled Payments and
                        Prepayments received thereon from and after the
                        Cut-Off Date (including all Scheduled Payments due
                        prior to, but not received as of, the Cut-Off Date,
                        but excluding any Scheduled Payments due on or after,
                        but received prior to, the Cut-Off Date);
 
                        (ii) the interest of the Depositor in the equipment
                        subject to such Contracts (the "Equipment"), which
                        interest is either an ownership interest or a security
                        interest (see "The Contracts -- Description of the
                        Contracts");
 
                        (iii) amounts on deposit in (and Eligible Investments
                        allocated to) certain Accounts established pursuant to
                        the Indenture and held by, or in the name of, the
                        Indenture Trustee, including the Collection Account;
                        and
 
                        (iv) certain other property and assets as herein
                        described.
 
                      A portion of the Trust Assets will secure payment of the
                      Notes. See "Source of Payment and Security" below.
 
                      The aggregate of the Contract Principal Balances of the
                      Contracts as of the Cut-Off Date (the "Cut-Off Date
                      Contract Pool Principal Balance," which will include
                      certain Scheduled Payments due prior to, but not
                      received as of, the Cut-Off Date) will equal the sum of
                      the initial principal balances of the Notes and the
                      Equity Certificates.
</TABLE>
 
                                       6
<PAGE>
 
<TABLE>
<S>                   <C>
SOURCE OF PAYMENT
 AND SECURITY.......  Principal of and interest on the Notes will be paid on
                      each Payment Date solely from, and secured by, the
                      Amount Available for such Payment Date, which is (1) the
                      sum of (a) those Pledged Revenues on deposit in the
                      Collection Account as of the last Business Day preceding
                      such Payment Date which were (i) received by or on
                      behalf of the Indenture Trustee during the preceding
                      calendar month (the "Collection Period"), or (ii) to the
                      extent necessary to pay interest on the Notes and the
                      Equity Certificates on such Payment Date, received by or
                      on behalf of the Indenture Trustee after such Collection
                      Period, plus (b) amounts permitted to be withdrawn
                      therefor from the Cash Collateral Account, as described
                      under "Cash Collateral Account" below, less (2) the
                      amounts described in clauses (i) and (ii) under
                      "Priority of Payments" below.
 
                      "Pledged Revenues" will consist of (i) "Scheduled
                      Payments" on the Contracts (which will consist of all
                      payments under the Contracts other than those portions
                      of such payments which, under such Contracts, are to be
                      (A) applied by the Servicer to the payment of insurance
                      premiums, maintenance, taxes and other similar
                      obligations, or (B) retained by the Servicer in payment
                      of Administrative Fees, received on or after the Cut-Off
                      Date (including all Scheduled Payments due prior to, but
                      not received as of, the Cut-Off Date, but excluding any
                      Scheduled Payments due on or after, but received prior
                      to, the Cut-Off Date) and due during the term of the
                      Contracts (without giving effect to end of term
                      extensions or renewals thereof); (ii) any voluntary
                      prepayments ("Prepayments") received on or after the
                      Cut-Off Date under the Contracts, which, in the case of
                      a Prepayment received under any Lease Contract, will not
                      exceed the amount described under "Contract Prepayments"
                      below; (iii) any amounts paid by TCC to purchase
                      Contracts due to a breach of representations and
                      warranties or by the Depositor to purchase the
                      Contracts, as described under "Optional Purchase of
                      Contracts" below, (iv) certain of the proceeds derived
                      from the liquidation of the related Equipment (net of
                      liquidation expenses) under any defaulted Contracts, as
                      described under "Contract Defaults" below; and (v) any
                      earnings on the investment of amounts credited to the
                      Collection Account.
 
ORIGINATORS OF THE
 CONTRACTS..........  The Contracts that are expected to constitute a portion
                      of the Trust Assets on and after the Merger Consummation
                      Date have been originated or, in some cases, acquired by
                      four wholly owned subsidiaries of TCC: AT&T Capital
                      Leasing Services, Inc. ("Leasing Services"), AT&T Credit
                      Corporation ("Credit Corp."), NCR Credit Corp. ("NCR
                      Credit"), and AT&T Commercial Finance Corporation
                      ("CFC") (collectively, the "Originators"). See "AT&T
                      Capital Corporation" and "The Originators."
</TABLE>
 
                                       7
<PAGE>
 
THE CONTRACTS.......  The aggregate of the Contracts and the related Equipment
                      expected to be held by the Owner Trust as part of the
                      Trust Assets, as of any particular date, is referred to
                      as the "Contract Pool," and the Contract Pool, as of the
                      Cut-Off Date is referred to as the "Final Contract
                      Pool." The Depositor has prepared certain statistics
                      relating to the pool of Contracts which, subject to the
                      exception noted below, will constitute the Final
                      Contract Pool. These statistics are based on such
                      Contracts as of August 1, 1996 (the "Initial
                      Determination Date"), and the Final Contract Pool will
                      consist of such Contracts, less that portion of the
                      Contract Principal Balances which are paid or prepaid
                      from the Initial Determination Date to the Cut-Off Date.
                      Accordingly, the statistics relating to such pool of
                      Contracts (the "Initial Contract Pool") will differ
                      somewhat from the Final Contract Pool; however, the
                      statistics relating to the Final Contract Pool will be
                      included in the final Prospectus. As of the Initial
                      Determination Date, (i) the Contract Pool Principal
                      Balance (the "Initial Determination Date Contract Pool
                      Principal Balance") was approximately $       ; (ii)
                      there were approximately        Contracts; (iii) the
                      average Contract Principal Balance was $       ; (iv) of
                      such Contracts, approximately   % (by Initial
                      Determination Date Contract Pool Principal Balance)
                      related to Lease Contracts and approximately   % (by
                      Initial Determination Date Contract Pool Principal
                      Balance) were Loan Contracts; (v) approximately   % of
                      such Contracts (by Initial Determination Date Contract
                      Pool Principal Balance) were [type of Equipment],
                      approximately   % of such Contracts (by Initial
                      Determination Date Contract Pool Principal Balance)
                      related to [type of Equipment] and approximately   % of
                      such Contracts (by Initial Determination Date Contract
                      Pool Principal Balance) related to [type of Equipment];
                      (vi) no more than approximately   % of such Contracts
                      (by Initial Determination Date Contract Pool Principal
                      Balance) were with respect to Obligors [Equipment]
                      located in any one State; (vii) no more than   % of the
                      Contracts (by Initial Determination Date Contract Pool
                      Principal Balance) had a Contract Principal Balance
                      exceeding $       ; (viii) approximately   % of the
                      Contracts (by Initial Determination Date Contract Pool
                      Principal Balance) had been originated by the
                      Originators with the remaining   % of the Contracts
                      having been originated by third parties and purchased by
                      one of the Originators; (ix) the remaining term of the
                      Contracts as of the Initial Determination Date ranged
                      from    months to    months; and (x) the weighted
                      average remaining term of the Contracts as of the
                      Initial Determination Date was   months. See "The
                      Contracts -- Certain Statistics Relating to the Initial
                      Contract Pool."
 
                                       8
<PAGE>
 
<TABLE>
<S>                   <C>
                      TCC will make certain representations and warranties
                      regarding each Contract, and will be obligated to
                      purchase any Contract in the event of a breach of any
                      such representation or warranty that materially and
                      adversely affects the value of such Contract. See "The
                      Contracts -- Representations and Warranties Made by
                      TCC."
 
CONTRACT
 PREPAYMENTS........  TCC will represent and warrant that none of the Lease
                      Contracts permit the Obligor thereunder to prepay the
                      amounts due under such Lease Contract or otherwise
                      terminate the Lease Contract prior to its scheduled
                      expiration date (except for a de minimis number of Lease
                      Contracts which allow for a prepayment or early
                      termination upon payment of an amount which is not less
                      than the Contract Principal Balance). Under the Transfer
                      and Servicing Agreement, the Servicer will be permitted
                      to allow Prepayments of the Lease Contracts to the exent
                      that, the amount of the prepayment on any Lease Contract
                      is at least equal to the Contract Principal Balance of
                      such Lease Contract (after application of the current
                      month's Scheduled Payment), plus the current month's
                      Scheduled Payment and any delinquent payments. The Loan
                      Contracts permit the Obligor thereunder to prepay the
                      Loan Contract, in whole or in part, at any time at par
                      plus accrued interest. Approximately   % of the
                      Contracts (by Initial Determination Date Contract Pool
                      Principal Balance) were Loan Contracts. In no event will
                      the Notes or the Equity Certificates be entitled to
                      receive more than the Contract Principal Balance (after
                      application of the current month's Scheduled Payment),
                      plus the current month's Scheduled Payment and any
                      delinquent Scheduled Payments.
</TABLE>
 
                                       9
<PAGE>
 
<TABLE>
<S>                   <C>
CONTRACT DEFAULTS...  Proceeds from disposition of the Equipment subject to
                      Lease Contracts will not be available to make payments
                      on the Notes or the Equity Certificates, except in the
                      event of a default thereunder. In the event of a default
                      under a Lease Contract, the proceeds derived from the
                      sale or other disposition of the related Equipment (net
                      of liquidation expenses) will be allocated on a pro rata
                      basis between the Equipment Certificate, on the one
                      hand, and the Notes and the Equity Certificates, on the
                      other, based respectively on (a) the Book Value of the
                      Equipment (which is equal to the value of the Equipment
                      as shown on the accounting books and records of TCC as
                      of the Cut-Off Date) and (b) the Contract Principal
                      Balance of the related Lease Contract (after application
                      of the current month's Scheduled Payment), plus the
                      current month's Scheduled Payment and any delinquent
                      payments, all determined as of the month of liquidation.
                      In no event will the Notes or the Equity Certificates be
                      entitled to receive more than the Contract Principal
                      Balance (plus the current and any delinquent Scheduled
                      Payments) from the proceeds of a defaulted Lease
                      Contract. All such liquidation proceeds from a defaulted
                      Lease Contract and allocable to the Notes and the Equity
                      Certificates, together with all proceeds of the
                      liquidation of a defaulted Loan Contract (net of
                      liquidation expenses), will be deposited in the
                      Collection Account and constitute part of the Amount
                      Available to be applied to the payment of interest and
                      principal on the Notes and the Equity Certificates in
                      accordance with the priorities described under "Priority
                      of Payments" below.
 
NO SUBSTITUTION.....  Under the Trust Agreement, the Owner Trustee is not
                      permitted to accept (from the Depositor, TCC or any
                      other party) any lease, contract or other asset or
                      property in substitution for any part of the Trust
                      Assets, including any of the Contracts.
</TABLE>
 
                                       10
<PAGE>
 
<TABLE>
<S>                   <C>
SERVICING...........  The Servicer will be responsible for managing,
                      administering, servicing and making collections on the
                      Contracts. Compensation to the Servicer will include a
                      monthly fee (the "Servicing Fee"), which will be payable
                      to the Servicer from the Amount Available on each
                      Payment Date, in an amount equal to the product of
                      one-twelfth of   % per annum multiplied by the greater
                      of (a) the Contract Pool Principal Balance or (b) the
                      aggregate principal amount of the Notes and the Equity
                      Certificates, both as of the last day of the second
                      preceding calendar month, plus any late fees,
                      documentation fees, insurance administration charges and
                      other administrative charges (the "Administrative Fees")
                      collected with respect to the Contracts during the prior
                      Collection Period. The Servicer may be terminated as
                      Servicer under certain circumstances, in which event a
                      successor Servicer would be appointed to service the
                      Contracts. See "AT&T Capital Corporation" and
                      "Description of the Transfer and Servicing Agreement --
                      Servicing -- Events of Servicing Termination."
 
MANDATORY PURCHASE
 OF CERTAIN
 CONTRACTS..........  TCC will make certain representations and warranties
                      with respect to each Contract and the related Equipment,
                      as more fully described in "The Contracts --
                      Representations and Warranties Made by TCC." The
                      Indenture Trustee will be entitled to require TCC to
                      purchase any Contract and the related Equipment, at a
                      price equal to the Contract Principal Balance (after
                      application of the current month's Scheduled Payment),
                      plus the current month's Scheduled Payment and any
                      delinquent payments, plus the Book Value of the
                      Equipment (which amount will be payable on the Equipment
                      Certificate), if the value of the Contract is materially
                      and adversely affected by a breach of any such
                      representation or warranty which is not cured within a
                      specified period (a "Repurchase Event").
 
EQUITY
 CERTIFICATES.......  The Owner Trust will issue the Equity Certificates,
                      representing a beneficial ownership interest in the
                      Owner Trust, to the Depositor and transferred by it in a
                      separate transaction. The Equity Certificates will
                      represent an undivided interest in all Pledged Revenues,
                      and will be paid in the priority described under
                      "Priority of Payments" below. It is expected that the
                      Equity Certificates initially will represent the right
                      to receive principal in an amount equal to approximately
                      4% of the Cut-Off Date Contract Pool Principal Balance,
                      together with interest thereon at an interest rate of
                        % per annum. Commencing on the first Payment Date, a
                      portion of the Monthly Principal Amount will be payable
                      on the Equity Certificates until the aggregate amount so
                      paid equals $       .
</TABLE>
 
                                       11
<PAGE>
 
<TABLE>
<S>                   <C>
EQUIPMENT
 CERTIFICATE........  The Owner Trust will issue the Equipment Certificate,
                      representing a beneficial ownership interest in the
                      Owner Trust, to the Depositor. The Equipment Certificate
                      will represent an undivided interest in:
 
                      (i)  all related Equipment or  the proceeds thereof upon
                      the expiration of the  initial term (without giving  any
                        effect  to end of term  extensions or renewals) of any
                        Lease Contracts;
 
                      (ii) any amount in excess of the amounts described under
                        "Contract Prepayments"  above  paid  by  a  Lessee  in
                        connection with the prepayment or early termination of
                        a   Lease  Contract,  which   excess  is  intended  to
                        represent the value of the Equipment related thereto;
 
                      (iii) a  portion of  the  proceeds (net  of  liquidation
                      expenses)  derived from the sale or other disposition of
                        the related  Equipment  following a  default  under  a
                        Lease Contract, as described under "Contract Defaults"
                        above; and
 
                      (iv) that portion of the purchase price allocable to the
                      Book  Value of the related Equipment  (a) paid by TCC to
                        purchase any Contract due to a breach of any of  TCC's
                        representations    and   warranties   regarding   such
                        Contract, or (b) paid by the Depositor pursuant to its
                        option to repurchase all the outstanding Contracts.
 
                      Amounts payable in respect of the Equipment Certificate
                      are not available to pay, and will not provide security
                      for the payment of, interest or principal on the Notes
                      or the Equity Certificates.
 
COLLECTION
 ACCOUNT............  The Indenture Trustee will establish and maintain one or
                      more separate accounts (collectively, the "Collection
                      Account"). All Scheduled Payments and Prepayments from
                      Obligors that are received by the Servicer on behalf of
                      the Owner Trust will be deposited in the Collection
                      Account no later than five Business Days following
                      receipt thereof by the Servicer. The Servicer will be
                      permitted to use any alternative remittance schedule
                      which is acceptable to the Rating Agencies if the effect
                      thereof will not result in a reduction or withdrawal of
                      any of the ratings then applicable to the Notes. See
                      "Description of the Transfer and Servicing Agreement --
                      Collections on Contracts."
</TABLE>
 
                                       12
<PAGE>
 
<TABLE>
<S>                   <C>
CASH COLLATERAL
 ACCOUNT............  A "Cash Collateral Account" will be established on or
                      prior to the Merger Consummation Date and will
                      thereafter be available to the Indenture Trustee. The
                      Cash Collateral Account will be funded in an amount
                      equal to    % of the Cut-Off Date Contract Pool
                      Principal Balance ($      ). Amounts on deposit from
                      time to time in the Cash Collateral Account (up to, but
                      not in excess of, the Requisite Amount described below,
                      and not including any investment earnings on such funds)
                      shall be used, to the extent that amounts on deposit in
                      the Collection Account as of any Payment Date are
                      insufficient to do so, (and provided that any such
                      deficiency has resulted, directly or indirectly, from
                      delinquencies and/or defaults on the Contracts):
 
                      (i)  to  pay  interest  on  the  Notes  and  the  Equity
                      Certificates in the following order of priority:
 
                      (a) interest on the Class A Notes (including any overdue
                          interest and interest thereon),
 
                      (b) interest on the Class B Notes (including any overdue
                          interest and interest thereon),
 
                      (c) interest on the Class C Notes (including any overdue
                          interest and interest thereon), then
 
                      (d) interest on the Equity Certificates (including any
                          overdue interest and interest thereon);
 
                      (ii)  to pay  any Principal Deficiency  Amount (equal to
                      the  lesser  of  (a)  the  Current  Realized  Losses  on
                        Liquidated Contracts for the related Collection Period
                        or  (b) the excess, if any, of the aggregate Principal
                        Balance of  the  Notes  and  the  Equity  Certificates
                        (after  giving  effect to  all other  distributions of
                        principal on  such Payment  Date), over  the  Contract
                        Pool  Principal  Balance as  of  the last  day  of the
                        related  Collection   Period   plus   all   delinquent
                        Scheduled Payments in respect of principal); and
 
                      (iii)   to  pay  principal  on   the  Notes  and  Equity
                      Certificates at  the  applicable  Stated  Maturity  Date
                        thereof.
 
                      If and to the extent that the amount on deposit in the
                      Cash Collateral Account as of any Payment Date is less
                      than the Requisite Amount (which is defined as being an
                      amount equal to $      , subject to certain
                      adjustments), then such deficiency is to be restored
                      from the remaining Amount Available, after payment of
                      interest and principal on the Notes and the Equity
                      Certificates as described under "Priority of Payments"
                      below. Any amount on deposit in the Cash Collateral
                      Account in excess of the Requisite Amount, and all
                      investment earnings on funds in the Cash Collateral
                      Account, will be released from the Cash Collateral
                      Account and paid to or upon the order of the Depositor,
                      and will not be available to make payments on the Notes
                      or the Equity Certificates. See "Description of the
                      Notes -- Cash Collateral Account."
</TABLE>
 
                                       13
<PAGE>
 
<TABLE>
<S>                   <C>
PRIORITY OF
 PAYMENTS...........  On each Payment Date, the Indenture Trustee will be
                      required to make the following payments, first, from
                      Pledged Revenues on deposit in the Collection Account as
                      of the last Business Day preceding such Payment Date
                      which were received by or on behalf of the Indenture
                      Trustee during the preceding Collection Period, second,
                      to the extent the foregoing Pledged Revenues are
                      insufficient to pay interest on the Notes and the Equity
                      Certificates on such Payment Date, the amount necessary
                      to cure such deficiency from the Pledged Revenues on
                      deposit in the Collection Account as of the last
                      Business Day preceding such Payment Date which were
                      received by or on behalf of the Indenture Trustee after
                      the preceding Collection Period, and, thereafter (but
                      only as to amounts described in clause (iii) and certain
                      amounts included in clause (iv)), from amounts permitted
                      to be withdrawn from the Cash Collateral Account as
                      described under "Cash Collateral Account" above, in the
                      following order of priority:
 
                      (i) the Servicing Fee and any other amounts then due and
                        payable  under the Transfer and Servicing Agreement in
                        connection with servicing the Contracts;
 
                      (ii) the fees and expenses of the Indenture Trustee  and
                      the Owner Trustee then due and payable;
 
                      (iii)  interest on the Notes and the Equity Certificates
                      in the following order of priority:
 
                      (a) interest on the Class A Notes (including any overdue
                          interest and interest thereon),
 
                      (b) interest on the Class B Notes (including any overdue
                          interest and interest thereon),
 
                      (c) interest on the Class C Notes (including any overdue
                          interest and interest thereon), then
 
                      (d) interest on the  Equity Certificates (including  any
                          overdue interest and interest thereon);
 
                      (iv)  an amount equal to the Monthly Principal Amount as
                      of such  Payment Date  in respect  of principal  on  the
                        Notes  and  the  Equity Certificates  in  the priority
                        described under "Principal" above; and
 
                      (v) the remainder to the Cash Collateral Account, to  be
                        applied in the manner described under "Cash Collateral
                        Account" above.
</TABLE>
 
                                       14
<PAGE>
 
<TABLE>
<S>                   <C>
OPTIONAL PURCHASE OF
 CONTRACTS..........  The Depositor may purchase all of the Contracts on any
                      Payment Date following the date on which the unpaid
                      principal balance of the Notes and the Equity
                      Certificates is equal to 10% or less of the Cut-Off Date
                      Contract Pool Principal Balance, subject to certain
                      provisions as described herein under "Description of the
                      Notes -- Optional Purchase of Contracts." The purchase
                      price to be paid in connection with such purchase shall
                      be equal to the unpaid principal balance of the Notes
                      and the Equity Certificates as of such Payment Date plus
                      interest to be paid on the Notes and the Equity
                      Certificates on such Payment Date, plus the Book Value
                      of the Equipment. The proceeds of such purchase shall be
                      applied on such Payment Date (i) as to such proceeds in
                      respect of principal and interest on the Notes and the
                      Equity Certificates, to the payment of the remaining
                      principal balance on the Notes and the Equity
                      Certificates, together with interest thereon, and (2) as
                      to the balance of such proceeds, to the payment of
                      amounts on the Equipment Certificate.
 
SPECIAL
 REDEMPTION.........  If the Merger has not been consummated by September   ,
                      1996, all of the Notes shall be redeemed and paid in
                      full on September   , 1996 (the "Special Redemption
                      Date") at a redemption price (the "Special Redemption
                      Price") which is equal to (i) in respect of any Class of
                      Notes, the initial offering price of such Class of Notes
                      as shown on the cover page of this Prospectus, plus (ii)
                      interest on such offering price, from (and including)
                      the Closing Date to (but excluding) such Special
                      Redemption Date, at the rate of 10% per annum. The
                      Special Redemption Price in respect of the Notes will be
                      paid from the proceeds of the issuance of the Notes and
                      the Equity Certificates and additional cash on deposit
                      in the Escrow Account held by the Indenture Trustee
                      pursuant to the Indenture, which will be funded on the
                      Closing Date in an amount equal to the aggregate Special
                      Redemption Price. A public notice of the Special
                      Redemption, if any, will be provided by publication in
                      Luxembourg. If the Merger is consummated on or prior to
                      September   , 1996, the Trust Assets will be deposited
                      by the Depositor with the Indenture Trustee, on behalf
                      of the Owner Trust, on the Merger Consummation Date and
                      the amounts on deposit in the Escrow Account will be
                      paid over to the Depositor. See "Description of the
                      Notes -- Special Redemption of the Notes."
</TABLE>
 
                                       15
<PAGE>
 
<TABLE>
<S>                   <C>
U.S. TAXATION.......  In the opinion of counsel to the Depositor and counsel
                      to the Underwriters, the Notes will be characterized as
                      indebtedness and the Owner Trust will not be
                      characterized as an "association" or "publicly traded
                      partnership" taxable as a corporation for federal income
                      tax purposes. Each Noteholder, by its acceptance of a
                      Note, will agree to treat the Notes as indebtedness for
                      federal, state and local income tax purposes.
                      Prospective investors are advised to consult their own
                      tax advisors regarding the federal income tax
                      consequences of the purchase, ownership and disposition
                      of Notes, and the tax consequences arising under the
                      laws of any state or other taxing jurisdiction. See
                      "United States Taxation."
 
                      In the opinion of counsel, under United States federal
                      income tax law in effect as of the date hereof, payments
                      of principal and interest on the Notes to a United
                      States Alien Holder will not be subject to United States
                      federal withholding tax (subject to the exceptions noted
                      in "United States Taxation -- Tax Consequences to United
                      States Alien Holders"). If such law were to change and,
                      as a result thereof, United States withholding tax were
                      imposed on such payments, a United States Alien Holder
                      would receive such payments net of such withholding tax,
                      and neither the Owner Trust, the Depositor, TCC nor any
                      other party would have any obligation to "gross-up" such
                      payments to compensate for such withholding tax.
 
ERISA
 CONSIDERATIONS.....  If the Notes are considered to be indebtedness without
                      substantial equity features under a regulation issued by
                      the United States Department of Labor, the acquisition
                      or holding of Notes by or on behalf of a Benefit Plan
                      will not cause the assets of the Owner Trust to become
                      plan assets, thereby generally preventing the
                      application of certain prohibited transaction rules of
                      the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, as
                      amended, and the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as
                      amended, that otherwise could possibly be applicable.
                      The Depositor believes that the Notes should be treated
                      as indebtedness without substantial equity features for
                      purposes of such regulation. See "ERISA Considerations."
</TABLE>
 
                                       16
<PAGE>
 
<TABLE>
<S>                   <C>
REGISTRATION,
 CLEARANCE AND
 SETTLEMENT OF
 NOTES..............  Each of the Notes will be registered in the name of Cede
                      & Co., as the nominee of DTC, and will be available for
                      purchase only in book-entry form on the records of DTC
                      and participating members thereof. Notes will be issued
                      in definitive form only under the limited circumstances
                      described under "Description of the Notes -- Definitive
                      Notes." All references herein to "Holders" or
                      "Noteholders" shall reflect the rights of beneficial
                      owners of Notes (the "Note Owners"), as they may
                      indirectly exercise such rights through DTC and
                      participating members thereof, except as otherwise
                      specified herein. See "Description of the Notes --
                      Book-Entry Registration." Noteholders may elect to hold
                      their Notes through DTC (in the United States) or Cedel
                      Bank or Euroclear (in Europe). Transfers will be made in
                      accordance with the rules and operating procedures
                      described in Appendix A hereto.
 
LISTING.............  Application has been made to list the Notes on the
                      Luxembourg Stock Exchange.
 
GOVERNING LAW.......  The   Transfer  and   Servicing  Agreement,   the  Trust
                      Agreement, the Transfer Agreement, the Indenture and the
                      Notes will be governed by the  laws of the State of  New
                      York.
</TABLE>
 
                                       17
<PAGE>
                                  RISK FACTORS
 
    Prospective  Noteholders should consider the following factors in connection
with the purchase of the Notes:
 
LIMITED LIQUIDITY
 
    There is currently no  market for the Notes.  Goldman, Sachs & Co.  expects,
but  will not be obligated, to make a market for the Notes in the United States;
and Nomura  International plc  expects, but  will not  be obligated,  to make  a
market for the Notes outside the United States. There can be no assurance that a
secondary market for the Notes will develop or, if it does develop, that it will
provide  the Holders of such Notes with liquidity of investment or will continue
for the life  of such  Notes. Although  it is expected  that the  Notes will  be
listed  on the Luxembourg Stock  Exchange, there can be  no assurances that such
listing will increase the liquidity of the Notes.
 
    The Notes will be issued in book-entry, rather than physical, form and, as a
result, in certain circumstances,  the liquidity of the  Notes in the  secondary
market  and  the ability  of the  Noteholders  to pledge  them may  be adversely
affected. See  "Underwriting"  and  "Description  of  the  Notes  --  Book-Entry
Registration."  The Notes will be registered in the  name of DTC and will not be
registered in the names of the beneficial owners or their nominees. As a  result
of  this, unless and until definitive, fully  registered Notes are issued in the
limited circumstances described  under "Description of  the Notes --  Definitive
Notes,"  beneficial owners  will not be  recognized by the  Indenture Trustee as
Noteholders, as that  term is  used in the  Indenture. Hence,  until such  time,
beneficial  owners  will only  be  able to  exercise  the rights  of Noteholders
indirectly through DTC  and its  participating organizations.  In addition,  the
laws  of some states require that certain purchasers of securities take physical
delivery of such securities in certificated form. Such limits and such laws  may
impair the ability to transfer beneficial interests in the Notes.
 
SUBORDINATION; LIMITED ASSETS
 
    To   the  extent  described  herein  under  "Description  of  the  Notes  --
Distributions" and "-- Subordination," payments of interest and principal on the
Class B  Notes will  be subordinated  in  priority of  payment to  interest  and
principal,  respectively, on  the Class  A Notes,  and payments  of interest and
principal, respectively, on the Class C Notes will be similarly subordinated  in
priority of payment to interest and principal on the Class A Notes and the Class
B Notes. In addition, payments of principal on the Notes will be subordinated in
priority  of  payment  to payments  of  interest  on the  Notes  and  the Equity
Certificates. The  Equity Certificates  initially will  represent the  right  to
receive  principal in an  amount equal to  4% of the  Cut-Off Date Contract Pool
Principal Balance, but  such amount  will be reduced  as a  result of  principal
payments  made  on the  Equity Certificates  (see "Description  of the  Notes --
Principal"), which will reduce the benefit to the Notes of the subordination  of
the  Equity Certificates. The  Notes are secured  by the payments  to be derived
from  the  Contracts  but  not  any  payments  constituting  proceeds  from  the
disposition  of Equipment  (except in the  case of a  defaulted Contract), which
amounts will  be  paid  solely  to the  holder  of  the  Equipment  Certificate.
Moreover, from and after the Merger Consummation Date, the Owner Trust will have
no  assets other than the  Contracts, the Equipment and  amounts on deposit from
time to time in the Collection Account and the accounts established pursuant  to
the  Transfer  and Servicing  Agreement.  The Notes  will  represent obligations
solely of the Owner Trust, and none of the Notes will be insured or  guaranteed,
directly  or indirectly,  by TCC,  the Depositor,  the Indenture  Trustee or the
Owner Trustee (or any Affiliate of any  of them) or any other person or  entity.
Consequently,  Holders  of  the Notes  must  rely  for payment  of  interest and
principal thereon  on a  given Payment  Date on  the Amount  Available for  such
Payment  Date. Delinquencies and  defaults on the  Contracts could eliminate the
protection afforded the Class C Noteholders  by the Cash Collateral Account  and
the  subordination of the Equity Certificates, and the Class C Noteholders could
incur losses on their investment as a result. Further delinquencies and defaults
on the  Contracts  could  eliminate  the  protection  offered  to  the  Class  B
Noteholders  by the subordination of the Class  C Notes, and could eliminate the
protection afforded the Class A Noteholders by the subordination of the Class  B
Notes, and such Noteholders could incur losses on their investment as a result.
 
                                       18
<PAGE>
YIELD AND PREPAYMENT CONSIDERATIONS
 
    The  weighted average life of  the Notes will be  reduced by prepayments and
early terminations of  the Contracts.  Prepayments may result  from payments  by
Obligors,  certain amounts received as a  result of default or early termination
of a Contract, the receipt of proceeds from the physical damage to the Equipment
to the extent  described herein  under "The Contracts,"  purchases by  TCC as  a
result of certain uncured breaches of the representations and warranties made by
it  with  respect to  the Contracts  and  the Equipment  (see "The  Depositor --
Representations and Warranties  Made by  TCC") or the  Depositor exercising  its
option   to  purchase  all  of  the   remaining  Contracts  and  Equipment  (see
"Description of the Notes --  Optional Purchase of Contracts"). Generally,  none
of  the  Lease  Contracts  permit a  prepayment  or  early  termination thereof.
Nevertheless, TCC historically has permitted lessees to terminate leases  early,
either  in connection with the execution of a new lease of replacement equipment
or upon payment of  a negotiated prepayment premium,  or both. The Transfer  and
Servicing  Agreement will permit the Servicer to allow a voluntary prepayment of
a Lease Contract by a Lessee at any  time so long as the amount paid thereon  is
at  least equal to the Contract Principal  Balance of such Lease Contract (after
application of the current month's Scheduled Payment), plus the current  month's
Scheduled  Payment  and  any  delinquent  payments. Approximately      %  of the
Contracts (by Initial Determination Date  Contract Pool Principal Balance)  were
Loan  Contracts, which permit the Obligor to prepay the Contract, in whole or in
part, at any time. The amounts so received in respect of the Contract  Principal
Balance  and current and  delinquent Scheduled Payments  are to be  added to the
Amount Available and applied  in the priority described  in "Description of  the
Notes  --  Distributions."  The  Noteholders  will  bear  all  reinvestment risk
resulting from the timing of payments of principal on the Notes.
 
    If the Merger is not consummated (see  "The Merger") by September   ,  1996,
all  of the  Notes will be  redeemed on the  Special Redemption Date  at a price
equal to the  Special Redemption  Price. While the  Depositor has  no reason  to
believe   that  the  regulatory  approvals  which  are  a  precondition  to  the
consummation of the Merger  will not be  obtained on or  prior to its  scheduled
date  (September 17, 1996), there  can be no assurances  that the Merger will in
fact be consummated by September   , 1996.
 
BANKRUPTCY OR INSOLVENCY RISKS
 
    The Depositor believes that the transfer of the Contracts and the  Equipment
from the Originators to the Depositor constitutes a sale or absolute assignment,
rather  than a pledge to secure indebtedness of TCC or the Originators; and that
in the event  that TCC  or any  of the Originators  were to  become bankrupt  or
otherwise  insolvent, a  trustee in bankruptcy  would be  unable to successfully
challenge the  transfer of  the  Contracts and  the  Equipment or  otherwise  to
interfere  with the timely transfer to the Owner Trust of payments received with
respect to the  Contracts. However, if  TCC or  any of the  Originators were  to
become  a debtor under  the federal bankruptcy code  or similar applicable state
laws (collectively, "Insolvency Laws"), a  creditor or trustee in bankruptcy  of
TCC  or  such  Originator,  or TCC  or  such  Originator or  either  of  them as
debtor-in-possession, might argue that  such transfer of  the Contracts and  the
Equipment   from  the   Originators  to   the  Depositor   was  (or   should  be
recharacterized as) a pledge of such  assets rather than a sale. This  position,
if  presented to or  accepted by a  court, could cause,  among other things, the
Owner Trust  to  experience  a delay  in  or  reduction of  collections  on  the
Contracts.
 
    A  case decided by the United States  Court of Appeals for the Tenth Circuit
contains  language  to  the  effect  that  accounts  sold  by  an  entity   that
subsequently  became  bankrupt  remained  property  of  the  debtor's bankruptcy
estate. Although the Contracts constitute  chattel paper or general  intangibles
rather  than accounts  under the Uniform  Commercial Code (the  "UCC"), sales of
chattel paper, like sales of accounts, are governed by Article 9 of the UCC.  If
TCC  or any of the Originators were to  become a debtor under any Insolvency Law
and a court were to follow the  reasoning of the Tenth Circuit Court of  Appeals
and  apply such reasoning to  chattel paper, the Owner  Trust could experience a
delay in or reduction of collections on the Contracts.
 
    The Depositor has  taken certain steps  to minimize the  likelihood that  it
will  become bankrupt or otherwise insolvent. The Depositor is prohibited by its
organizational documents and the Transfer and Servicing Agreement from  engaging
in   activities   (including  the   incurrence  or   guaranty  of   debt)  other
 
                                       19
<PAGE>
than those set forth in the Transfer and Servicing Agreement. See "The Depositor
and the Owner Trust -- The Depositor."  The Indenture Trustee, on behalf of  the
Noteholders,   will  covenant  not  to   subject  the  Depositor  to  bankruptcy
proceedings until the Notes have been paid in full and one year and one day  has
elapsed.  The Depositor  believes that  such actions  substantially mitigate the
risk of an involuntary bankruptcy petition being filed against it.
 
    The Depositor has also taken steps  to minimize the likelihood that, in  the
event of a bankruptcy of TCC, the bankruptcy court would order the consolidation
of  the assets and liabilities of the  Depositor with the assets and liabilities
of TCC. Such steps include the maintenance of separate books and records and the
insistence on arm's-length terms in all agreements with TCC, the Originators and
affiliates thereof. Nevertheless, there can be  no assurance that, in the  event
of  a bankruptcy or insolvency of TCC or any Originator, a court would not order
that the Depositor's assets and liabilities be consolidated with those of TCC or
such Originator. Any such order would adversely affect the Owner Trust's ability
to receive payments on the Contracts.
 
    TCC  will  make  certain   representations  and  warranties  regarding   the
Contracts,  the  Equipment  and certain  other  matters (see  "The  Contracts --
Representations and  Warranties  Made by  TCC").  In  the event  that  any  such
representation  or warranty, with regard to a specific Contract, is breached, is
not cured within a specified period of  time, and the value of such Contract  is
materially  and  adversely affected  by such  breach, TCC  shall be  required to
purchase the Contract  and the related  Equipment at  a price equal  to (i)  the
Contract  Principal Balance of  such Contract (after  application of the current
month's Scheduled Payment), plus the  current month's Scheduled Payment and  any
delinquent  payments, plus (ii) the Book Value  of the related Equipment. In the
event of a  bankruptcy or insolvency  of TCC, the  Indenture Trustee's right  to
compel  a purchase would both be impaired and  would have to be satisfied out of
the available assets, if any, of TCC's bankruptcy estate.
 
    From and after the Merger Consummation Date, substantially all of the equity
capital of TCC  will be owned  by HoldCo.,  and the capitalization  of TCC  will
differ from the capitalization of TCC prior to the Merger. See "The Merger."
 
CERTAIN LEGAL ASPECTS
 
    The transfer of the Contracts by the Originators to the Depositor and by the
Depositor  to the Owner Trust, the perfection of the interest of the Owner Trust
in the  Contracts and  the right  to  receive payments  thereon, and  the  Owner
Trust's  security interest in such Contracts and in the Equipment are subject to
the requirements of the UCC  as in effect in New  York and the states where  the
various  Originators are located and, with  respect to certain of the Equipment,
in the various states in which the Equipment subject to the applicable  Contract
is  located from time to time. The Depositor will take or cause to be taken such
actions as  are required  to perfect  the transfer  to the  Owner Trust  of  the
Depositor's   rights  in  the  Contracts  and  the  right  to  receive  payments
thereunder.
 
    It has been the general  policy of TCC, depending  on the dollar amount  and
type  of the particular Contract, the perceived credit quality of the particular
Obligor or the estimated repossession value of the particular related Equipment,
not to file or (in certain cases) not to obtain or file UCC financing statements
with  respect  to  the  Equipment  relating  to  certain  Contracts.  See   "The
Originators  -- Underwriting and Servicing."  It is estimated that approximately
  % of  the Contracts  (by Cut-Off-Date  Contract Pool  Principal Balance)  will
relate  to Equipment as to which no UCC financing statement has been filed. With
respect to  such Contracts,  a  purchaser from  the  applicable Obligor  of  the
related Equipment would acquire such Equipment free and clear of the interest of
the applicable Originator in such Equipment, and a creditor of the Obligor which
has  taken  a security  interest in  such  Equipment and  filed a  UCC financing
statement with respect  thereto would  have priority  over the  interest of  the
applicable  Originator in such  Equipment. Any such  purchaser or creditor would
have an interest superior to the interest of the Owner Trust in such  Equipment,
which  interest  is  derived from  the  transfer  and conveyance  of  a security
interest in  the Equipment  by the  Depositor to  the Owner  Trust. All  of  the
Contracts prohibit the Obligor from selling or pledging the related Equipment to
third parties.
 
                                       20
<PAGE>
    Due  to the  administrative burden  and expense,  no assignments  of the UCC
financing statements evidencing the security interest of the Originators in  the
Equipment  (to the extent that such financing statements have been filed against
the Obligor, as discussed  above) will be filed  to reflect the Depositor's  and
the Owner Trust's interests therein. While failure to file such assignments does
not  affect  the perfection  of  the Owner  Trust's  interest in  such Contracts
(including the related Originator's security interest in the related Equipment),
it does expose the Owner Trust to the risk that the Originator could release its
security interest in the Equipment of record, and it could complicate the  Owner
Trustee's enforcement, as assignee, of the Originator's security interest in the
Equipment.  In addition, also  due to the administrative  burden and expense, no
UCC financing statement reflecting the security  interest of the Owner Trust  in
the  related Equipment will be filed in  the jurisdictions (other than the State
of New Jersey) where the Equipment is  located. In the absence of such  filings,
the Owner Trust may not have a perfected security interest in such Equipment. As
a  result, if the  Originator were to sell  or grant a  security interest in any
Equipment to a third party, such  third party might acquire such Equipment  free
and  clear of the interest of the Owner Trust in such Equipment and a subsequent
secured party or  other lienholder  might obtain  an interest  in the  Equipment
superior  to  that  of  the  Owner Trust.  These  risks  should  not  affect the
perfection or priority of the  interest of the Owner  Trust in the Contracts  or
rights to payment
thereunder.  Additionally, statutory liens for repairs or unpaid taxes and other
liens arising by operation  of law may have  priority even over prior  perfected
security interests in the name of the Owner Trustee in the Equipment.
 
    The  Servicer will hold the  Contract Files (as defined  below) on behalf of
the Owner  Trust  under  a  custodian  agreement  with  the  Owner  Trustee.  To
facilitate  servicing and save  administrative costs, the  documents will not be
physically segregated from other  similar documents that  are in the  Servicer's
possession.   UCC  financing  statements  will   be  filed  in  the  appropriate
jurisdictions reflecting  the  sale  and  assignment of  the  Contracts  by  the
Originators to the Depositor, and the Servicer's accounting records and computer
systems  will also  reflect such  sale and  assignment. The  Contracts will not,
however, be  stamped or  otherwise marked  to reflect  that such  Contracts  and
Equipment  have  been  sold  to  the  Depositor.  If,  through  inadvertence  or
otherwise, any  of the  Contracts were  sold  to another  party (or  a  security
interest  therein  were granted  to  another party)  that  purchased (or  took a
security interest in) any of such  Contracts in the ordinary course of  business
and  took possession of  such Contracts, the purchaser  (or secured party) would
acquire an interest in the Contracts superior to the interest of the Owner Trust
if the purchaser (or  secured party) acquired (or  took a security interest  in)
the  Contracts for new value  and without actual knowledge  of the Owner Trust's
interest.
 
NO GROSS-UP FOR WITHHOLDING TAX
 
    In the opinion of  counsel, under current United  States federal income  tax
law  in effect as of the date hereof,  payments of principal and interest on the
Notes to a  United States  Alien Holder  will not  be subject  to United  States
federal  withholding  tax (subject  to the  exceptions  noted in  "United States
Taxation -- Tax Consequences to United States Alien Holders"). If such law  were
to change and, as a result thereof, United States withholding tax was imposed on
such  payments, a United States Alien Holder  would receive such payments net of
such withholding tax; and  neither the Owner Trust,  the Depositor, TCC nor  any
other  party has any  obligation to gross  up such payments  to account for such
withholding tax.
 
                                   THE MERGER
 
    On June 5, 1996,  Antigua Acquisition Corporation,  a newly formed  Delaware
corporation ("MergerCo."), executed an Agreement and Plan of Merger (the "Merger
Agreement")  with Hercules  Limited, a  newly formed  Cayman Islands corporation
("HoldCo."), TCC and  AT&T Corp. ("AT&T"),  which provides for  the merger  (the
"Merger")  of MergerCo. with and into TCC and pursuant to which each outstanding
share of common stock, par value $0.01 per share ("Common Stock"), of TCC (other
than shares owned by TCC, HoldCo.,  MergerCo., or their respective wholly  owned
subsidiaries  or by any stockholders  properly exercising their appraisal rights
under Delaware law  ("Excluded Shares"))  will be  converted into  the right  to
receive   $45  in  cash  per  share,   without  interest  thereon  (the  "Merger
Consideration"). In addition,  pursuant to  the terms of  the Merger  Agreement,
each outstanding option on shares
 
                                       21
<PAGE>
of  Common  Stock  (the "Options"),  other  than those  management  options (the
"Management Options")  held  by  certain  members  of  management  of  TCC  (the
"Management Offerees") which may be exchanged for new options to purchase common
stock  of the surviving  corporation, will be canceled  upon consummation of the
Merger in exchange  for cash  in an  amount equal to  the excess  of the  Merger
Consideration over the Option exercise price per share. The Merger is subject to
certain  regulatory approvals  and other  conditions precedent  (set out below).
Upon consummation of the Merger, the  current stockholders of TCC will cease  to
be  stockholders of TCC, except that the Management Offerees will be offered the
opportunity to maintain all or a  portion of their current equity investment  in
TCC  and  may  be  granted  new  options  for  common  stock  of  the  surviving
corporation. All of the outstanding equity  capital of MergerCo. will, save  for
the  Management  Offerees, be  owned by  HoldCo. All  of the  outstanding equity
capital of HoldCo. is owned by a  group of companies led by GRS Holding  Company
Limited.  The Depositor is a wholly owned subsidiary of MergerCo. and will, upon
consummation of  the Merger,  be a  wholly  owned subsidiary  of TCC  (see  "The
Depositor and the Owner Trust -- The Depositor").
 
    Under   the  Merger  Agreement,  the   respective  obligations  of  HoldCo.,
MergerCo., AT&T and TCC to consummate the Merger are subject to the  fulfillment
or  waiver,  where  permissible, of  the  following  conditions at  or  prior to
September 17, 1996:  (i) the  expiration or  termination of  the waiting  period
applicable  to the Merger under the Hart-Scott-Rodino Antitrust Improvements Act
of 1976, as amended; (ii) the  receipt of all required consents,  registrations,
approvals,  permits and  authorizations in  full force  and effect  and (iii) no
court or  governmental  entity of  competent  jurisdiction shall  have  enacted,
issued,   promulgated,  enforced  or  entered  any  statute,  rule,  regulation,
judgment, decree, injunction  or other order  that is in  effect and  restrains,
enjoins or otherwise prohibits consummation of the Merger Agreement.
 
    The obligation of HoldCo. to consummate the Merger is further conditioned on
(i)  the truth and accuracy in all  material respects of the representations and
warranties made by TCC and AT&T in the Merger Agreement; (ii) the performance in
all material  respects of  all obligations  of  TCC and  AT&T under  the  Merger
Agreement,  (iii) the receipt by TCC and AT&T of the consent or approval of each
person whose consent  or approval is  required, except for  those for which  the
failure  to obtain such consent  or approval is not  reasonably likely to have a
material adverse effect on TCC; (iv) the receipt by HoldCo. of the  resignations
of each director of TCC; and (v) AT&T and TCC having entered into a transitional
services agreement.
 
    The  obligations  of  TCC and  AT&T  to  consummate the  Merger  are further
conditioned on  (i) the  truth and  accuracy  in all  material respects  of  the
representations   and  warranties  made  by  HoldCo.  and  MergerCo.;  (ii)  the
performance  in  all  material  respects  of  all  obligations  of  HoldCo.  and
MergerCo.;  and (iii) the receipt by HoldCo.  of the consent or approval of each
person whose consent  or approval  is required,  except for  those consents  for
which the failure to obtain such consent or approval is not reasonably likely to
have  a  material adverse  effect  on the  ability  of HoldCo.  or  MergerCo. to
consummate the Merger.  HoldCo. has  received an  unconditional and  irrevocable
undertaking from Nomura International plc to underwrite an international capital
markets  issue on behalf of HoldCo. to  satisfy its obligations under the Merger
Agreement.
 
    The consummation  of the  Merger is  currently scheduled  for September  17,
1996. It is currently anticipated that all regulatory approvals will be obtained
on  or  around September  17, 1996.  If the  Merger is  not consummated,  or the
Servicer has not executed the Transfer and Servicing Agreement, by September   ,
1996, all of the  Notes will be redeemed  and prepaid on September    , 1996  as
described under "Description of the Notes -- Special Redemption."
 
                       THE DEPOSITOR AND THE OWNER TRUST
 
THE DEPOSITOR
 
    Antigua  Funding Corporation is incorporated under  the laws of the State of
Delaware. Prior to the  Merger Consummation Date, all  of the equity capital  of
the  Depositor will be owned  by MergerCo. All of  the initial equity capital of
MergerCo.  will  be  owned   by  HoldCo.  See  "The   Merger."  On  the   Merger
 
                                       22
<PAGE>
Consummation  Date, MergerCo. and TCC will merge, the corporate entity resulting
from, and surviving, such merger will be  TCC, and the Depositor will then be  a
wholly  owned subsidiary  of TCC.  On the Merger  Consummation Date,  all of the
Contracts and the interests of the Originators in the related Equipment will  be
transferred  by the Originators to the  Depositor in consideration for which the
Depositor shall  pay to  the  Originators the  net  proceeds received  from  the
offering and sale of the Notes and the Equity Certificates.
 
    On  the Merger Consummation Date, the  Depositor will transfer and convey to
the Indenture Trustee, on behalf  of the Owner Trust,  all of the Contracts  and
its  interest in the Equipment related thereto  in consideration for (i) the net
proceeds received  from  the offering  and  sale of  the  Notes and  the  Equity
Certificates  and (ii) the Equipment Certificate. All  of the Notes will be sold
to third parties pursuant  to this Prospectus, the  Equity Certificates will  be
issued to the Depositor and transferred by it in a separate transaction, and the
Equipment  Certificate will be issued  to and retained by  the Depositor. On the
Closing Date, the Depositor and the  Owner Trustee will execute and deliver  the
Trust  Agreement  (with effect  from such  date),  and the  Owner Trust  and the
Indenture Trustee will execute and deliver the Indenture (with effect from  such
date), and on the Merger Consummation Date, the Depositor and the Servicer shall
execute  and deliver the Transfer and Servicing Agreement (with effect from such
date). If for any reason, the Merger Consummation Date has not occurred, or  the
Servicer has not executed and delivered the Transfer and Servicing Agreement, by
September    , 1996, then the Notes  shall be redeemed at the Special Redemption
Price on the Special Redemption Date.
 
    The Depositor has been  formed solely for the  purposes of the  transactions
described  in this  Prospectus; and  under its  incorporation documents  and the
Transfer and Servicing Agreement,  the Depositor is not  permitted to engage  in
any  activity  other  than (i)  acquiring  the  Contracts and  interests  of the
Originators in the  Equipment related thereto,  (ii) transferring and  conveying
such Contracts and interest in the Equipment to the Owner Trust, (iii) executing
and performing its obligations under the Transfer Agreement and the Transfer and
Servicing  Agreement, (iv) holding  or transferring the  Equity Certificates and
the Equipment Certificate,  and (v)  engaging in  other transactions,  including
entering  into  agreements,  that  are  necessary,  suitable  or  convenient  to
accomplish the foregoing or are  incidental thereto or connected therewith.  The
Depositor  is prohibited  from incurring  any debt,  issuing any  obligations or
incurring any liabilities, except in connection with the formation of the  Owner
Trust and the issuance of the Notes. The Depositor is not liable, responsible or
obligated, directly or indirectly, for payment of any principal, interest or any
other amount in respect of any of the Notes.
 
THE OWNER TRUST
 
    The  Owner Trust will be  created pursuant to the  Trust Agreement. Prior to
the Closing Date, the Owner Trust will have no assets, property or  obligations.
From  the Closing Date to the Merger  Consummation Date, the assets of the Owner
Trust (the "Trust Assets") will consist solely of the proceeds of the Notes  and
the  Equity  Certificates  and additional  cash  held (and  invested  in certain
Eligible Investments) in the Escrow Account (which amounts will be sufficient to
pay the Special  Redemption Price  in respect  of the  Notes and  to redeem  the
Equity  Certificates  on  the  Special  Redemption Date  if  the  Merger  is not
consummated by September   , 1996).
 
    From and after the Merger Consummation  Date, the Trust Assets will  consist
of  (i) a pool of  approximately     equipment lease contracts, installment sale
contracts, promissory  notes, loan  and security  agreements and  other  similar
types  of  receivables  (each,  a "Contract"),  with  various  lessees  or other
obligors thereunder (each,  an "Obligor"),  including the right  to receive  all
Scheduled  Payments received thereon from and  after the Cut-Off Date (including
all payments  due prior  to,  but not  received as  of,  the Cut-Off  Date,  but
excluding  any payments  due on  or after,  but received  prior to,  the Cut-Off
Date), (ii) the interest of the Depositor in the equipment subject to each  such
Contract  (the "Equipment"), which interest is either an ownership interest or a
security interest,  (iii)  amounts  on  deposit  in  (and  Eligible  Investments
allocated  to) certain  Accounts established pursuant  to the  Indenture and the
Transfer and Servicing  Agreement, including  the Collection  Account, and  (iv)
certain other property and assets as herein described.
 
                                       23
<PAGE>
    The  Owner Trust  will not  engage in any  business activity  other than (i)
issuing the Notes and the Certificates, (ii) holding and dealing with (including
disposing of) the Owner Trust Assets, (iii) making payments on the Notes and the
Certificates, (iv) entering into and performing the duties, responsibilities and
functions required under  the Transfer and  Servicing Agreement, the  Indenture,
the Contracts, and related documents, and (v) matters related to the foregoing.
 
CAPITALIZATION OF THE OWNER TRUST
 
    The  following table illustrates the capitalization of the Owner Trust as of
the Cut-Off  Date, as  if the  issuance and  sale of  the Notes  and the  Equity
Certificates offered hereby had taken place on such date:
 
<TABLE>
<S>                                                               <C>
Class A Receivable - Backed Notes...............................  $
Class B Receivable - Backed Notes...............................  $
Class C Receivable - Backed Notes...............................  $
Equity Certificates.............................................  $
                                                                  ---------
    Total.......................................................  $
</TABLE>
 
THE OWNER TRUSTEE
 
                       will  be the Owner Trustee under the Trust Agreement. The
Owner Trustee is a                banking corporation and its principal  offices
are located at          ,          ,          . The Owner Trustee's liability in
connection  with the issuance and sale of  the Notes and the Equity Certificates
is limited solely to the express obligations  of the Owner Trustee set forth  in
the Trust Agreement and the Indenture.
 
                            AT&T CAPITAL CORPORATION
 
    AT&T  Capital Corporation  ("TCC") is a  full-service, diversified equipment
leasing and finance company that operates  principally in the United States  and
also has operations in Europe, Canada, the Asia/Pacific region, Mexico and South
America.  TCC is one of  the largest equipment leasing  and finance companies in
the United States, based on the aggregate value of equipment leased or financed,
and is the largest lessor of telecommunications equipment in the United States.
 
    TCC, through its various subsidiaries, leases and finances a wide variety of
equipment,  including  general  office,  manufacturing  and  medical  equipment,
telecommunications  equipment  (such  as  private  branch  exchanges,  telephone
systems and voice processing units),  information technology equipment (such  as
personal  computers, retail point of sale systems and automatic teller machines)
and transportation  equipment (primarily  vehicles). In  addition, TCC  provides
inventory  financing for equipment dealers,  franchise financing for franchisees
and financing  collateralized  by  real  estate.  TCC's  leasing  and  financing
services  are marketed to (i) customers of equipment manufacturers, distributors
and dealers with which TCC has  a marketing relationship for financing  services
and  (ii)  directly  to  end-users  of  equipment.  TCC's  approximately 500,000
customers include large  global companies,  small and  mid-sized businesses  and
federal, state and local governments and their agencies.
 
    During  its 10 year history, TCC  has achieved significant growth in assets,
finance volume (aggregate dollar amount of equipment and other items  financed),
revenues  and  net  income.  At  December  31,  1995,  TCC's  total  assets were
approximately $9.5  billion,  an increase  of  18.9% over  the  prior  year-end;
finance  volume for 1995 was $4.6 billion,  an increase of 7.4% over 1994; total
revenues for 1995 were  $1.6 billion, an  increase of 13.9%  over 1994; and  net
income  of $127.6  million for 1995  was 27.1%  greater than the  net income for
1994. Total assets at the end of  the second quarter of 1996 were  approximately
$       billion representing a    % increase over total assets at the end of the
second quarter of 1995, and net income of $31.0 million for the first six months
of  1996  represented  an  increase  of  47.7%  over  the  net  income  for  the
corresponding period in 1995.
 
    TCC's  predecessor was founded in 1985 by  AT&T as a captive finance company
to assist  its  equipment  marketing  and  sales  efforts  by  providing  AT&T's
customers  with sophisticated financing. In 1993,  AT&T sold 14% of TCC's common
stock   in   an    initial   public   offering.    TCC's   common   stock    has
 
                                       24
<PAGE>
traded  on  the New  York Stock  Exchange under  the symbol  "TCC." While  it is
anticipated that TCC's common  stock will be delisted  upon the consummation  of
the  Merger (see "The Merger"),  TCC will, from time  to time, continue to issue
securities in the public market and, accordingly, will continue to be subject to
the informational requirements of the Exchange Act and, in accordance therewith,
will file reports and other information with the Commission.
 
    On September 20, 1995,  AT&T announced plans to  separate itself into  three
publicly  traded companies  (AT&T, Lucent  Technologies Inc.  ("Lucent") and NCR
Corporation ("NCR"))  and to  sell its  remaining equity  interest in  TCC in  a
public or private sale. See "The Merger."
 
    TCC has an experienced management team; its six executive officers have been
in  management positions with TCC for an average  of 10 years and, on a combined
basis have more than 100 years  experience in the equipment leasing and  finance
industry.  At June  30, 1996, TCC  and its subsidiaries  had approximately 2,850
employees. The principal  executive offices of  TCC are located  at 44  Whippany
Road, Morristown, New Jersey 07962.
 
    The  Contracts comprising the Trust Assets  have been originated or, in some
cases, purchased from third  parties by four wholly  owned subsidiaries of  TCC:
AT&T   Capital  Leasing   Services,  Inc.  ("Leasing   Services"),  AT&T  Credit
Corporation  ("Credit  Corp."),  NCR  Credit  Corp.  ("NCR  Credit")  and   AT&T
Commercial Finance Corporation ("CFC") (collectively the "Originators").
 
                                THE ORIGINATORS
 
AT&T CAPITAL LEASING SERVICES, INC.
 
    Leasing  Services provides leasing and  financing programs for manufacturers
and distributors as well as leasing and financing to existing customers. Leasing
Services (formerly  known as  Eaton  Financial Corporation)  was acquired  by  a
predecessor  of Credit Corp. in March 1989, and became a wholly owned subsidiary
of a predecessor of  TCC in connection with  TCC's reorganization in March  1990
and  thereafter became a wholly owned subsidiary of TCC in connection with TCC's
restructuring in March 1993.
 
    Leasing Services is headquartered in Framingham, Massachusetts and employed,
as of June 30, 1996, approximately 425 people in a network of four full  service
offices  throughout the  United States and  a support office  in Framingham. Its
portfolio includes office automation and general-purpose business equipment such
as copiers  and  computers,  as  well as  industry-specific  equipment  such  as
printing,  machine tools  and medical/dental  equipment. At  June 30,  1996, the
Leasing Services  portfolio  was comprised  of  the following  equipment  types:
computers      %,  copiers     %,  machine  tool manufacturing  equipment     %,
medical/dental equipment    %, printing  equipment    %, automobile  test/repair
equipment   % and other   %.
 
    At  June 30, 1996,    % of Leasing  Services' portfolio consisted of leases.
Approximately   % of such leases  include fair market value purchase options  in
favor  of the  applicable lessee  upon expiration  of the  applicable lease. The
balance of the leases  contain fixed price or  nominal purchase options. All  of
its  leases are noncancelable obligations and all are "triple net" leases, under
which the lessee is  responsible for all maintenance,  insurance, and taxes.  At
June 30, 1996,    % of Leasing Services' portfolio consisted of loans, which are
prepayable,  in whole or  in part, at any  time, and under  which the obligor is
responsible for all maintenance, insurance and taxes.
 
    Leasing Services' total portfolio, consisting of over        accounts as  of
June  30,  1996, is  comprised mainly  of small  and medium-sized  companies. In
addition to a large customer base,  the portfolio is broadly diversified; as  of
June  30, 1996, the  ten largest accounts comprised  only     % of the aggregate
portfolio. As of June 30, 1996, the average exposure per customer for the entire
portfolio was approximately $      . In terms of geographical distribution, five
states (California    %,  Florida   %, New  York   %, Texas    % and New  Jersey
  %)  accounted for approximately   %  of outstanding receivables as of June 30,
1996.
 
                                       25
<PAGE>
    Leasing Services' credit and collections operations are decentralized within
its network  of  four full-service  offices  located in  the  Atlanta,  Georgia,
Dallas,  Texas, San Francisco, California and Boston, Massachusetts metropolitan
areas. As of  June 30, 1996,  Leasing Services had      members responsible  for
credit and contract approval and collections activities.
 
AT&T CREDIT CORPORATION AND NCR CREDIT CORP.
    Credit  Corp.  supports  the sales  of  AT&T,  Lucent and  NCR  equipment by
providing leasing and financing options to customers who have selected equipment
manufactured or  supplied  by  these vendors.  Credit  Corp.'s  predecessor  was
established as a captive finance company of AT&T in 1985. The predecessor of NCR
Credit, which is a wholly owned subsidiary of Credit Corp., was established as a
captive  finance  company of  NCR  in 1980.  In  1992, when  AT&T  acquired NCR,
ownership of NCR Credit was  transferred to TCC. At  that time Credit Corp.  and
NCR Credit operated as separate business units of TCC. In 1995, TCC consolidated
the  operations  of  NCR  Credit  and Credit  Corp.;  relocated  the  credit and
collections operations  supporting  NCR  Credit from  Dayton,  Ohio,  to  Credit
Corp.'s  executive offices in Parsippany, New Jersey; ceased using NCR Credit to
originate new financings; and began using Credit Corp. to originate business  in
that  market segment. As  of June 30, 1996,  Credit Corp. employed approximately
   members.
 
    Substantially all  of  Credit  Corp.'s transactions  are  generated  through
Lucent  and NCR, which  currently are subsidiaries  of AT&T. Lucent manufactures
and distributes telecommunications and  related equipment, and NCR  manufactures
and  distributes information technology (including retail point-of sale systems,
automatic teller  machines  ("ATMs")  and  computers). At  June  30,  1996,  the
combined portfolio of Credit Corp. and NCR Credit was comprised of the following
equipment  types: telecommunications equipment      %, computer equipment     %,
retail point-of-sale systems    %, ATMS    %, and other    %.
 
    Transactions generated from the sales  of Lucent equipment historically  are
small  ticket transactions (   accounts;  average transaction size of $        ;
   % of the combined portfolio)  and middle market transactions  (     accounts;
average  transaction  size of  $          ;      %  of the  combined portfolio).
Transactions generated from the sales  of NCR equipment historically are  middle
market transactions (    accounts; average transaction size of $       ;    % of
the  combined portfolio).  In terms of  geographical distribution,  the top five
states (       ) accounted for approximately    % of the outstanding receivables
as of June 30, 1996.
 
    Credit Corp.'s credit and collection operations are handled on a centralized
basis through its executive  offices in Parsipanny, New  Jersey. As of June  30,
1996,  in New Jersey Credit Corp. had approximately      members responsible for
credit and contract approvals, documentation and collections. Substantially  all
of  these members  work in  teams that are  focused on  distinct market segments
(e.g., Lucent or NCR, small ticket or middle market, geographic). Other  members
provide company-wide oversight of the credit, contract and collections processes
associated  with the  portfolio originated  by Credit  Corp. and  NCR Credit. In
addition, as  of June  30, 1996  Credit  Corp. had  approximately        account
managers  located in Lucent offices throughout the United States to help process
credit applications and documentation packages.
 
AT&T COMMERCIAL FINANCE CORPORATION
    The  Portland  division  of  AT&T  Commercial  Finance  Corporation  ("CFC")
provides  financing and leasing  programs for manufacturers  and distributors of
material handling  and  construction  equipment.  CFC  was  formed  in  1990  in
connection with the acquisition of substantially all the assets of two divisions
of Pacificorp Credit, Inc.
 
    CFC  is headquartered in Portland, Oregon and  employed as of June 30, 1996,
  members, including   regionally  deployed sales representatives. CFC's  credit
and  collection operations are located in Portland, Oregon. As of June 30, 1996,
CFC had   members responsible for collections activity.
 
    At June 30, 1996, the CFC portfolio was comprised of the following equipment
types:         . At June  30, 1996,    % of CFC's  portfolio consisted of  lease
contracts  and   % consisted  of loan contracts. Approximately    % of the lease
contracts  include  fair  market  value   purchase  options  in  favor  of   the
 
                                       26
<PAGE>
applicable  lessee upon expiration  of the applicable lease.  The balance of the
lease  contracts  contain  fixed  price  or  nominal  options.  The  leases  are
noncancelable  obligations and are net leases in which the lessee is responsible
for all maintenance, insurance and taxes.
 
    CFC's retail portfolio,  consisting of over        accounts  as of June  30,
1996,  is  comprised  of  businesses  of varying  sizes  in  a  wide  variety of
industries. As of June 30, 1996, the average exposure per end user customer  was
approximately $       . The ten largest end user customer accounts comprised   %
of the aggregate portfolio. The CFC portfolio is also diversified geographically
with  six states (          ,           ,            ,           and           )
accounting for approximately   % of outstanding receivables as of June 30, 1996.
 
UNDERWRITING AND SERVICING
 
    CREDIT MANAGEMENT PHILOSOPHY
    TCC undertakes certain risks in connection with the management of its assets
and business, including credit risk and  residual value risk. The management  of
these  risks is critical to each strategic  business unit within TCC (an "SBU").
As  such,  TCC  has  in  place  policies,  controls  and  procedures  (including
sophisticated credit scoring systems in several of its SBUs which support credit
applications,  credit limit assignment  and collections) intended  to manage and
limit such risks,  promote early  problem recognition and  corrective action  as
well as facilitate consistent portfolio performance measurements. Such policies,
controls  and procedures are subject to periodic review by TCC's Risk Management
Department, which  includes legal,  credit and  asset management  personnel,  by
TCC's  internal auditors and TCC's Audit Committee. In addition, TCC's executive
officers, acting as a  committee (the "CLT"),  regularly monitors TCC's  overall
risk profile.
 
    The  control of credit losses is an important element of TCC's business. TCC
seeks to minimize its  credit risk through diversification  of its portfolio  by
customer,  industry segment, equipment type, geographic location and transaction
maturity. TCC's financing  activities have been  spread across a  wide range  of
equipment  types (E.G., general  equipment, telecommunications equipment, office
equipment, information technology and transportation equipment) and real  estate
and  a large number of end-users located  throughout the United States and, to a
lesser extent, abroad.
 
    Each SBU has a  senior credit officer and  a Credit Committee that  together
are  responsible for overseeing the quality,  integrity and performance of their
respective credit portfolios. Portfolio quality is monitored regularly to assess
the overall condition of the portfolio  and identify the major exposures  within
the  portfolio. Each SBU Credit Committee  is charged with the responsibility of
establishing credit  policies  appropriate  for its  business  and  periodically
reviewing  its credit personnel's exercise of  credit authority for adherence to
the established  credit policies.  Each  SBU Credit  Committee is  empowered  to
establish  credit authorities for qualified members of their credit staff for up
to $250,000. Approval  of new credit  authorities up to  $1,000,000 require  the
approval  of TCC's Chief Credit Officer or  its Chief Risk Management Officer in
addition to the  approval of the  SBU Credit Committee.  Approval of new  credit
authorities  in excess  of $1,000,000  also require the  approval of  the CLT or
TCC's Chief Executive  Officer. The  existing credit authorities  allow the  SBU
senior  credit officer to approve transactions up to $4.5 million in the case of
Credit Corp., up to  $2.0 million in  the case of Leasing  Services, up to  $3.0
million  in the case of NCR Credit and up to $2.0 million in the case of CFC. In
addition, approval by TCC's Chief Credit Officer, Chief Risk Management Officer,
Corporate Business Leader or CLT is  required for transactions in excess of  the
SBU's  credit  authority and  for certain  other  matters. The  credit authority
granted to approve  transactions may  not be  delegated. TCC  utilizes the  "one
obligor  concept"  in  computing  total credit  exposure;  the  level  of credit
authority required  to approve  incremental transaction  must be  sufficient  to
approve  the  customer's total  credit  exposure. Unless  otherwise specifically
approved, credit approvals are valid for up to 180 days.
 
    UNDERWRITING -- GENERAL
 
    TCC's  underwriting  standards  are  intended  to  evaluate  a   prospective
customer's  credit  standing and  repayment ability.  Credit decisions  are made
based upon the  credit characteristics  of the applicant,  loss experience  with
comparable  customers,  the  amount and  terms  and conditions  of  the proposed
transaction and the type of equipment to  be leased or financed. For almost  all
transactions under
 
                                       27
<PAGE>
$50,000  originated by Leasing  Services and Credit  Corp., sophisticated credit
scoring systems  (where  a computer  makes  the initial  credit  decision  after
consideration  of many  variables from  the credit  application data  and credit
bureau information, based on a statistical model of TCC's prior loss experience)
are utilized to  make credit  decisions. The  credit scoring  system, which  was
first  developed in 1989 and has been subsequently upgraded with the development
of  new  models,  is  designed  to   improve  credit  decisions  on  new   lease
applications,  expedite response times to customers and increase business volume
and portfolio profitability  while maintaining credit  quality. With respect  to
credit  decisions  for those  transactions which  are  not credit  scored, TCC's
credit  officers  conduct  various  credit  investigations  including  reference
calling  and the procurement and analysis of data from credit reporting agencies
such as Dun & Bradstreet,  TRW and other credit bureaux.  In the case of  larger
sized transactions (generally over $100,000), TCC's credit officers will attempt
to  obtain and  analyze financial  statements from  the customer.  The financial
analysis would typically involve a review of the potential customer's  leverage,
profitability,  liquidity and cash  flow among other  factors. TCC also requires
the credit personnel of each  SBU to rate the  creditworthiness of each of  such
unit's customer account over $100,000 and, in connection therewith, to take into
account  certain  other  factors  affecting  the  credit  risk  of  a particular
transaction, such as collateral  value, credit enhancement  and duration of  the
credit.
 
    UNDERWRITING -- ADVANCED CREDIT SCORING SYSTEMS
 
    In   1992,  TCC  commissioned  the  Bell  Laboratories  Operations  Research
Department ("Bell  Labs")  to design  decision  support systems  and  associated
strategies  for credit risk management  throughout the customer's financing life
cycle. This life cycle approach, while commonplace in the consumer credit field,
is not common in commercial leasing. Three sets of decision support systems were
developed and implemented, covering each stage of the small ticket leasing  life
cycle;  front-end  credit  decisions,  credit  line  management,  and delinquent
account collections.  Each  system is  comprised  of a  suite  of  statistically
derived  risk prediction models, a sequential decision strategy which determines
the model  to  be  used in  each  instance,  and a  risk  based  strategy  which
determines the optimal decision based upon the model results.
 
    Front-end  credit decisioning systems  improve the accuracy,  speed and cost
effectiveness of the credit  evaluation of new  credit applications. The  system
follows  a series of  steps including the selection  and electronic retrieval of
credit bureau information, the quantification of credit risk and the decision to
accept, reject  or manually  review  the credit  applicant. While  both  Leasing
Services  and Credit  Corp. have  been using  credit application  scoring models
since 1991  and 1989,  respectively, Leasing  Services implemented  an  improved
decisioning  system in March 1993, while Credit Corp. implemented such system in
May 1995.  Separate  credit  line  management models  have  been  developed  and
implemented  within Credit Corp. in May 1995 and are currently being implemented
within Leasing Services. Such  advanced credit scoring systems  are not used  by
CFC  and NCR Credit because the Contracts originated by each of them have larger
original balances.
 
    DOCUMENTATION
 
    Prior  to   funding  leasing   and   financing  transactions,   a   complete
documentation   package  (including  generally   a  credit  application,  signed
lease/installment  sale  or   financing  agreement,   vendor  invoice,   initial
lease/advance  payment,  proof  of  insurance  (where  relevant),  delivery  and
acceptance  acknowledgements  and  appropriate  UCC  financing  statements)   is
required.  Filing of UCC  financing statements typically  is required by Leasing
Services unless the  underlying equipment has  a cost of  less than $10,000  (or
$30,000  in  the case  of a  lease contract  with a  fair market  value purchase
option); by Credit Corp. unless the underlying equipment has a cost of less than
$20,000 (or $50,000 in  the case of  a lease contract with  a fair market  value
purchase  option; by NCR  Credit unless the  underlying equipment has  a cost of
less than $25,000; and by CFC in all transactions.
 
    BILLING
 
    Billing for Leasing Services and Credit  Corp. is handled by third  parties,
which  prepare and mail  monthly invoices. All customers  are assigned a billing
cycle and invoices are sent  either 19 days before the  due date in the case  of
Credit  Corp., 30 days before  the due date in the  case of Leasing Services, 20
days before the due date in the case of  CFC, or 25 days before the due date  in
the case of NCR Credit.
 
                                       28
<PAGE>
From  time to  time to facilitate  customer needs, the  Originators will provide
manual  invoices.  Monthly  invoices  include  the  scheduled  payment,   taxes,
insurance  and late charges, if any. The  vast majority of contracts provide for
level payments  throughout  their  term.  Substantially  all  customers  forward
payments to lockboxes with certain financial institutions.
 
    PORTFOLIO MONITORING
 
    Delinquency  is  tracked  monthly  for  each  major  portfolio  segment  and
calculated including  segmentation  by  classification  of  days  past  due.  In
addition,  non-accruals  are tracked  monthly,  including the  portion  which is
deemed to be at risk by the  SBU credit officials. Similarly, credit losses  are
monitored each month and are compared with credit losses for the previous months
and  the corresponding month in the  prior years. TCC also employs sophisticated
techniques in the analysis and oversight  of its portfolio. For that portion  of
the  portfolio  assets  consisting  of  transactions  under  $25,000,  roll rate
analysis (a type of portfolio analysis  examining the rate at which accounts  in
various  stages of  delinquency become,  or "roll" into,  losses) and  a type of
vintage analysis (another type of portfolio  analysis in which TCC's assets  are
classified by age and then compared across different years (e.g., comparing loss
experience  for  two-year-old portfolio  in 1996  with that  in 1995))  are used
together with other types of analyses (such as historical experience and various
industry indices) which are used broadly in evaluating TCC's portfolio.
 
    In addition  to  providing  an  initial credit  review,  the  credit  review
procedures  are designed to identify at an  early stage those customers that may
be experiencing  financial  difficulty.  Once identified,  these  customers  are
monitored  by credit personnel, who periodically make recommendations to the SBU
Credit Committee and/or  the CLT  about what portion,  if any,  of total  credit
exposures  should be written off or whether  a specific allocation of TCC's loss
reserves should be made.
 
    In establishing  allowances for  credit  losses, TCC's  management  reviews,
among  other things, the aging of TCC's portfolio, all non-performing leases and
receivables and prior collection experience,  as well as TCC's overall  exposure
and changes in credit risk.
 
    COLLECTIONS
    TCC  collects overdue  payments using  several different  methods. At Credit
Corp. and  Leasing Services,  sophisticated computerized  collection  management
systems  have  been developed  and deployed.  The collection  management systems
prioritize delinquent accounts  into automated queues  using delinquent  account
scoring  systems (also  referred to as  behavioral scoring).  Telephone calls to
delinquent accounts are automatically dialed by the system eliminating no answer
and busy line calls (which are automatically rescheduled).
 
    Accounts are ranked using a  suite of statistically derived risk  prediction
indicators  for  handling in  order of  risk  weighted exposure.  The collection
management systems  will entail  different account  collection strategies  as  a
function  of risk level  and account balance. Accounts  with low balances and/or
low risk  would be  assigned to  a  low impact  collection strategy  which  will
involve  fewer letters  and telephone  calls. Also,  the number  of days between
actions would be greater for a low risk account than in the case of a high  risk
account.  A high impact  collection strategy would be  assigned to accounts with
high balances and/or high risk scores. In this case, telephone collections would
be commenced sooner in  the collection process and  collection actions would  be
more closely spaced.
 
    At  NCR Credit and CFC, account collections  are undertaken in a more manual
fashion with prioritization being principally driven by the number of days  past
due.  Accounts  are typically  assigned  to individuals  or  groups who  will be
responsible to  ensure  appropriate  collection  activities  are  undertaken  to
effectuate customer payment. The collection process is undertaken using computer
generated  reminder notices  which are generally  sent once an  account is 10-15
days past due, individually tailored  collection letters and telephone  contact,
as appropriate. Outside collection agencies and attorneys are frequently used to
supplement  collection activity. Typically an account  is placed with an outside
collection agency or attorney  when it is  180 days or  more past due.  However,
accounts  past due  less than 180  days may  be placed with  a collection agency
depending  upon  the  circumstances  of   its  delinquency.  Equipment  may   be
repossessed  at any time after the contracted default but repossession typically
is not made until the account is past due between 70 and 180 days.
 
                                       29
<PAGE>
    NON-ACCRUAL AND WRITE-OFF POLICY
 
    TCC  maintains non-accrual and write-off policies  which are followed by all
SBU's. The policies require  that all accounts  which are 90  days past due  (or
sooner in the event of a bankruptcy or other appropriate evidence of impairment)
be  placed on non-accrual,  and be written  off or specifically  reserved at 180
days  past  due.   Larger  transactions  will   utilize  specific  reserves   to
appropriately  reduce the carrying value of the Equipment to an amount which may
be "covered" by collateral value.
 
                                 THE CONTRACTS
 
DESCRIPTION OF THE CONTRACTS
 
    THE FORMS OF CONTRACTS
 
    The Contracts which are  included in the Initial  Contract Pool (as  defined
under  "--Certain Statistics Relating to the  Initial Contract Pool"), as of the
Initial Determination Date (as defined  under "--Certain Statistics Relating  to
the  Initial  Contract  Pool"),  consist primarily  of  the  following  types of
instruments: approximately      % of such  instruments are  Lease Contacts,  and
approximately     % of such instruments are Loan Contracts. All of the Contracts
are commercial, rather than consumer, Leases or Loans.
 
    The Lease Contracts are generally  in one of two  forms: (a) a master  lease
agreement  containing  all of  the  general terms  and  conditions of  the lease
transaction or transactions, with schedules setting forth the specific terms  of
each lease transaction with that particular Obligor (a "Master Form Lease"), and
(b) specific lease agreement forms containing all of the terms and conditions of
the lease transaction (a "Specific Lease Form"). Credit Corp. generally uses the
Master Form Lease for lease transactions in excess of $100,000 and in connection
with  smaller transactions in which the Obligor has previously executed a Master
Form Lease; NCR Credit uses the Master  Form Lease for substantially all of  its
transactions;  CFC uses both a Specific Lease  Form and a Master Form Lease; and
Leasing Services  uses a  Master Form  Lease for  certain vendor  customers.  In
certain  cases, the Originators document a  Lease Contract on other forms, which
have been created  by one of  them or a  customer or are  leases that they  have
purchased  from vendors or  other lessors. The Loan  Contracts are documented on
installment sale  contract,  promissory  note,  chattel  mortgage  or  loan  and
security agreement forms.
 
    PAYMENTS GENERALLY
 
    Generally,  the Contracts included in the Initial Contract Pool require that
the Obligor make  periodic payments on  either a monthly  or a quarterly  basis,
while  a number  of Contracts (which,  in relation to  the Initial Determination
Date Contract Pool Principal Balance,  is not material) provide for  semi-annual
or  annual payments.  The payments  under all  of the  Contracts in  the Initial
Contract Pool are required to be made in United States dollars and are fixed and
specified payments, rather  than payments  which are tied  to a  formula or  are
otherwise  at  a  floating rate.  Payments  under the  Contracts  are ordinarily
payable in  advance,  although  a  small percentage  (including  most  of  those
originated by NCR Credit) provide for payments in arrears.
 
    EXPENSES
 
    All  of  the Contracts  included in  the Initial  Contract Pool  require the
Obligor to  assume  the  responsibility  for payment  of  all  expenses  of  the
Equipment  including (without  limitation) any  expenses in  connection with the
maintenance and repair of the Equipment, the payment of any and all premiums for
casualty and liability insurance  and the payment of  all taxes relating to  the
Equipment.
 
    INSURANCE; REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT
 
    Each  Lease  Contract (except  for  a small  number  of Contracts  which, in
relation to the Initial Determination  Date Contract Pool Principal Balance,  is
not  material) requires the  Obligor to maintain  liability insurance which must
name the  lessor  as additional  insured.  Lease Contracts  and  Loan  Contracts
require  Obligors  to  procure property  insurance  against the  loss,  theft or
destruction of, or  damage to,  the equipment  for its  full replacement  value,
naming the lessor (or lender) as loss payee. This
 
                                       30
<PAGE>
requirement  is, from time to time, waived  by the Originator for a small number
of transactions  and  for some  Lease  Contracts,  the Lessee  is  permitted  to
self-insure  the Equipment  under the  Lessee's already  existing self-insurance
program.
 
    For transactions involving leased Equipment with a cost of $100,000 or less,
the Lessee  is  generally  provided  with  written  information  concerning  its
property insurance obligations under the Lease Contract and the Originator's own
property  insurance coverage that will be provided  at the expense of the Lessee
if the Lessee  does not  provide Lessor with  satisfactory evidence  of its  own
insurance  coverage. The  Lessee is  given a specified  time period  in which to
provide such evidence. Proper evidence of coverage is verified independently and
tracked by a third party tracking company and licensed broker. If the Originator
provides the insurance coverage,  the Lessee is charged  a monthly fee  covering
the insurance premium and other related administrative charges. If, at any time,
the  Lessee provides evidence  of its own coverage,  such monthly charges cease.
The Lessee has the ability to "opt out" of the program by providing evidence  of
its own coverage.
 
    For  transactions involving  Equipment with  a cost  of more  than $100,000,
insurance  coverage  generally  is  verified  and  tracked  by  the   respective
Originator  and the failure  to maintain such insurance  constitutes an event of
default under the applicable Lease  Contract. Generally, either pursuant to  the
Specific  Lease  Form or  the  Master Form  Lease,  the Obligor  also  agrees to
indemnify the Originator for  all liability and expenses  arising from the  use,
condition or ownership of the Equipment.
 
    Under  each Lease  Contract, if the  Equipment is damaged  or destroyed, the
Obligor is  required to  (i)  repair such  Equipment,  (ii) make  a  termination
payment to the lessor in an amount not less than the Contract Principal Balance,
or  (iii) in some cases, replace such  damaged or destroyed Equipment with other
equipment of  comparable  use  and  value.  Under  the  Transfer  and  Servicing
Agreement,  the Servicer  is permitted  (in the case  of the  destruction of the
Equipment related to a particular Lease Contract) to either allow the Lessee  to
replace  such  Equipment (provided  that the  replacement  equipment is,  in the
judgment of the Servicer, of comparable use and at least equivalent value to the
value of the Equipment which was destroyed) or to accept the termination payment
referred to above.
 
    ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACTS
 
    All of the Contracts in the  Initial Contract Pool permit the assignment  of
the  Contract by the lessor or secured party without the consent of the Obligor,
except for a small number of Lease  Contracts which require notice to, or  prior
approval  by,  the Obligor  of such  assignment  to the  Obligors (and  TCC will
represent and warrant in the Transfer and Servicing Agreement that such  notices
have  been given,  or such  approvals have  been received,  prior to  the Merger
Consummation Date). None of  the Contracts in the  Initial Contract Pool  permit
the assignment of the Contract (or the Equipment related thereto) by the Obligor
without  the prior consent of the lessor  or secured party, other than Contracts
which (i) may  permit assignments  to a  parent, subsidiary  or affiliate,  (ii)
permit  the assignment  to a  third party,  provided the  Obligor remains liable
under the Contract, or (iii)  permit assignment to a  third party with a  credit
standing  (determined in accordance with the underwriting policy and practice at
the time for an equivalent  contract type, term and  amount) equal to or  better
than  the  original Obligor.  Under the  Transfer  and Servicing  Agreement, the
Servicer may permit an assignment of a particular Contract from an Obligor to  a
third  party only if  the Servicer (utilizing  the current underwriting criteria
for its contract  origination activities generally)  determines that such  third
party  is of sufficient credit quality that the Servicer would permit such third
party to become an obligor with respect  to a lease or loan contract  originated
by the Servicer generally.
 
    HELL-OR-HIGH-WATER LEASE CONTRACTS
 
    All   of   the   Lease  Contracts   in   the  Initial   Contract   Pool  are
"hell-or-high-water" contracts which require all payments thereunder to be  made
regardless  of  the  condition  or  suitability  of  the  related  Equipment and
notwithstanding any defense, set-off or  counterclaim that the Obligor may  have
against the lessor.
 
                                       31
<PAGE>
    EVENTS OF DEFAULT AND REMEDIES
 
    Events  of  default  under  the Contracts  in  the  Existing  Contract Pools
generally include the failure to pay  all amounts required by the Contract  when
due,  the failure of the  Obligor to perform its  agreements and covenants under
the applicable Contract,  material misrepresentations made  by the Obligor,  the
bankruptcy or insolvency of the Obligor or the appointment of a receiver for the
Obligor  and, in  some cases,  default by the  Obligor under  other contracts or
agreements. Some of these default provisions are, in some instances, subject  to
notice  provisions and cure periods. Remedies available to the lessor or secured
party upon the  occurrence of an  event of  default by the  Obligor include  the
right  to cancel or terminate, in the case of a Lease Contract, or to accelerate
payments in the case  of a Loan  Contract to recover  possession of the  related
Equipment, and to receive an amount intended to make the lessor or secured party
(as  the  case may  be) whole  plus  costs and  expenses (including  legal fees)
incurred by the lessor as a result of such default. Notwithstanding such  events
of  default  and  remedies,  under the  Transfer  and  Servicing  Agreement, the
Servicer is  permitted to  take such  actions, with  respect to  delinquent  and
defaulted  Contracts, as  a reasonably prudent  creditor would  do under similar
circumstances. See  "Description  of the  Transfer  and Servicing  Agreement  --
Servicing."
 
    PREPAYMENTS AND EARLY TERMINATION
 
    None  of the Lease  Contracts permit the prepayment  or early termination of
the Lease, except in a de minimis  number of cases which allow for a  prepayment
or early termination upon payment of an amount which is calculated in accordance
with  a formula which results in an  amount not less than the Contract Principal
Balance. Notwithstanding that fact, the Servicer is permitted under the Transfer
and Servicing Agreement to accept a  prepayment as part of an early  termination
of  the applicable Lease  Contract if the amount  paid is at  least equal to the
Contract Principal Balance (plus any delinquent payments). All or  substantially
all  of the Loan Contracts permit the  Obligors, at their option, to prepay such
Loans at any time at a price equal to the then outstanding principal amount plus
accrued interest  to the  date of  such prepayment  plus any  applicable  unpaid
charges. See "Description of the Notes -- Application of Prepayments."
 
    DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES
 
    Each  of the Lease Contracts included  in the Initial Contract Pool contains
provisions whereby  the lessor  disclaims  all warranties  with respect  to  the
Equipment  and, in the majority of  cases, the lessor assigns the manufacturer's
warranties to  the Lessee  for the  term of  the Lease.  Under the  Leases,  the
Obligor  "accepts" the Equipment  under the applicable  Lease Contract following
delivery and an opportunity to inspect the related Equipment.
 
    ADDITIONAL EQUIPMENT
 
    Some of the Lease Contracts in  the Initial Contract Pool constitute  Leases
of  "additional equipment" with existing Obligors.  Pursuant to the terms of the
original Lease Contract  between the lessor  and the Obligor,  these Leases  for
"additional  equipment" (generally costing $25,000 or  less) are documented on a
written form prepared by the lessor and  delivered to (but not executed by)  the
Obligor,  which written form describes all of  the terms of the Lease. Under the
terms of  the Lease  Contract, the  Obligor  agrees that  unless it  objects  in
writing  within a specified  period of time,  it is deemed  to have accepted the
Lease of such "additional equipment."
 
REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES MADE BY TCC
 
    Under the  Transfer and  Servicing Agreement,  TCC will  make the  following
representations  and warranties regarding each  Contract (and related Equipment)
included in the Final Contract Pool as of the Cut-Off Date:
 
    (A)Each Contract (i)  constitutes a valid,  binding and enforceable  payment
       obligation  of the Obligor in accordance with its terms (except as may be
limited by applicable bankruptcy, insolvency or other similar laws affecting the
enforceability of creditors' rights generally and the availability of  equitable
remedies),  (ii) has been duly  and properly sold, assigned  and conveyed by the
applicable Originator
 
                                       32
<PAGE>
under the Transfer  Agreement to the  Depositor and has  been duly and  properly
transferred  and conveyed by  the Depositor to  the Owner Trust  pursuant to the
Transfer and Servicing Agreement, (iii) was originated by one of the Originators
in the ordinary course  of such Originator's  business, or (in  the case of  any
Contract  purchased by one  of the Originators) was  acquired by such Originator
for proper consideration  and was  validly assigned  to such  Originator by  the
seller  of such Contract, and (iv) contains customary and enforceable provisions
adequate to enable realization against the Obligor and/or the related  Equipment
(although  no representation or warranty is  made with respect to the perfection
or priority of any security interest in such related Equipment);
 
    (B)No selection  procedures  adverse to  the  Noteholders were  utilized  in
       selecting  the Contracts from those lease and loan contracts owned by the
Originators on the Cut-Off Date;
 
    (C)All requirements  of  applicable  Federal,  state  and  local  laws,  and
       regulations  thereunder, in  respect of all  of the  Contracts, have been
complied with in all material respects;
 
    (D)There  is  no  known  default,  breach,  violation  or  event  permitting
       cancellation or termination of the Contract by the lessor (in the case of
Lease  Contracts) or by the secured party  (in the case of Loan Contracts) under
the terms of any Contract (other than payment delinquencies (in excess of 10% of
the  periodic  payment  due)  of  not  more  than  59  days),  and  (except  for
administrative  extensions in the case of certain Contracts which, in proportion
to the aggregate of all Contracts, is not material) there has been no waiver  of
any  of the foregoing; and as of the Cut-Off Date, no related Equipment had been
repossessed;
 
    (E)Immediately prior to the sale, assignment and conveyance of each Contract
       by an Originator to the Depositor, such Originator had good title to such
Contract conveyed to the Depositor and was  the sole owner thereof, free of  any
Lien;  and immediately prior to the transfer  and conveyance of the Contracts to
the Owner Trust, the  Depositor had good  title thereto and  was the sole  owner
thereof, free of any Lien created by the applicable Originator;
 
    (F)No  person has  a participation  in or  other right  to receive Scheduled
       Payments under any  Contract, and neither  the Depositor nor  any of  the
Originators  has taken any action  to convey any right  to any person that would
result in such person having a right to Scheduled Payments received with respect
to any Contract;
 
    (G)Each Contract was originated or purchased  by an Originator and was  sold
       by   such   Originator   to   the   Depositor   without   any   fraud  or
misrepresentation on the part of such Originator;
 
    (H)Each Obligor (i) is located in the United States, and (ii) is not (a) the
       United States of America or any State or local government or any  agency,
department,  subdivision or  instrumentality thereof  or (b)  the Depositor, the
Originators, TCC or any subsidiaries thereof;
 
    (I)No Contract  was  originated  in, or  is  subject  to the  laws  of,  any
       jurisdiction  the laws of which would make unlawful, void or voidable the
sale, transfer  and  assignment of  such  Contract  from an  Originator  to  the
Depositor  under the Transfer Agreement or  the transfer and conveyance from the
Depositor to the Owner Trust under the Transfer and Servicing Agreement;
 
    (J)All filings and other actions required to be made, taken or performed  by
       any  person in any jurisdiction to give  the Owner Trust a first priority
perfected lien or ownership interest in the Contracts will have been made, taken
or performed;
 
    (K)There exists  a  Contract File  pertaining  to each  Contract,  and  such
       Contract File contains the Contract or a facsimile copy thereof;
 
    (L)There  is only one original  executed copy of each  Contract or, if there
       are multiple originals, all such originals  are in the possession of  the
Originator  or the signed original in the  possession of the Originator is noted
thereon as being the only copy that constitutes chattel paper;
 
                                       33
<PAGE>
    (M)The Contracts constitute chattel paper within  the meaning of the UCC  as
       in effect in the States of New Jersey and Massachusetts (other than those
Contracts  in which  the lessor is  financing the Obligor's  software license or
maintenance contract for leased Equipment, which Contracts, in proportion to the
aggregate of all of the Contracts, are not material);
 
    (N)Each Contract was entered  into by an Obligor  who, at the Cut-Off  Date,
       had  not been identified  on the records  of TCC, the  Originators or the
Depositor as being the subject of a current bankruptcy proceeding;
 
    (O)The computer tape  containing information with  respect to the  Contracts
       that  was made available  by the Depositor  to the Owner  Trustee and the
Indenture Trustee on the Closing Date and was used to select the Contracts  (the
"Computer  Tape") was complete and  accurate in all material  respects as of the
Cut-Off Date and includes a description of the same Contracts that are described
in the Schedule of Contracts to the Transfer and Servicing Agreement;
 
    (P)By the Merger Consummation  Date, the portions  of the electronic  master
       record of TCC and the Depositor (the "Electronic Ledger") relating to the
Contracts  will  have been  clearly and  unambiguously marked  to show  that the
Contracts constitute part of the Trust Assets  and are owned by the Owner  Trust
in accordance with the terms of the Transfer and Servicing Agreement;
 
    (Q)No  Lease Contract  has a  payment delinquency (in  excess of  10% of the
       periodic payment due) of  more than 59  days past due  as of the  Cut-Off
Date;
 
    (R)Each  Contract may be sold, assigned and transferred by the Originator to
       the Depositor, and may  be assigned and transferred  by the Depositor  to
the  Owner  Trust  without  the  consent of,  or  prior  approval  from,  or any
notification to,  the  applicable  Obligor, other  than  (i)  certain  Contracts
(which, in proportion to the aggregate of all of the Contracts, is not material)
that  require notification of the assignment  to the Obligor, which notification
will have been given by the Servicer not later than 30 days following the Merger
Consummation Date and (ii) Contracts which  require the consent of the  Obligor,
which consent has been obtained prior to the Merger Consummation Date;
 
    (S)Each Contract prohibits the sale, assignment or transfer of the Obligor's
       interest  therein, the assumption of the  Contract by another person in a
manner that would release the Obligor thereof from the Obligor's obligation,  or
any  sale, assignment  or transfer of  the related Equipment,  without the prior
consent of the lessor  (in the case  of Lease Contracts) or  the lender (in  the
case of Loan Contracts), other than Contracts which may (i) permit assignment to
a  subsidiary, corporate parent or other  affiliate), (ii) permit the assignment
to a third  party, provided the  Obligor remains liable  under the Contract,  or
(iii)  permit assignment to a third party  with a credit standing (determined in
accordance with  the  underwriting  policy  and practice  at  the  time  for  an
equivalent  contract type, term and amount) equal to or better than the original
Obligor;
 
    (T)The Obligor under each Contract  is required to make payments  thereunder
       (i)  in United States dollars, and (ii) in fixed amounts and on fixed and
predetermined dates;
 
    (U)Each Contract requires the Obligor  to assume responsibility for  payment
       of  all expenses  in connection  with the  maintenance and  repair of the
related Equipment, the payment of all  premiums for insurance of such  Equipment
and the payment of all taxes (including sales taxes) relating to such Equipment;
 
    (V)Each  Contract  requires the  Obligor  thereunder to  make  all scheduled
       payments thereon under all circumstances and regardless of the  condition
or suitability of the related Equipment and notwithstanding any defense, set-off
or  counterclaim that the Obligor may have  against the lessor or lender (as the
case may be);
 
    (W)Under each Lease Contract, if the Equipment is damaged or destroyed,  the
       Obligor  is required  to either  (i) repair  such Equipment,  (ii) make a
termination payment  to the  lessor in  an  amount not  less than  the  Contract
Principal  Balance, or  (iii) in some  cases, replace such  damaged or destroyed
Equipment with other equipment of comparable use and value;
 
                                       34
<PAGE>
    (X)None of the  Lease Contracts  permit the  Lessee to  terminate the  Lease
       Contract prior to the Final Scheduled Payment Date or to otherwise prepay
the amounts due and payable thereunder, other than certain Lease Contracts which
do permit an early termination or prepayment, but in such cases the amount to be
paid  in connection  with such  termination or prepayment  is not  less than the
Contract Principal Balance (plus any delinquent payments and the next  Scheduled
Payment);
 
    (Y)Each  Loan Contract permits the prepayment  of the amount due thereunder,
       at the option  of the  Obligor, but  any such  prepayment must  be in  an
amount not less than the principal amount then outstanding plus accrued interest
thereon to the date of such prepayment; and
 
    (Z)It  is not  a precondition  to the  valid transfer  or assignment  of the
       Depositor's interest in any of the Equipment related to any Contract that
title to such  Equipment be transferred  on the records  of any governmental  or
quasi-governmental agency, body or authority.
 
    The above-described representations and warranties of TCC will be made as of
the Merger Consummation Date and will survive the transfer and assignment of the
related  Contracts and other Trust Assets to the Owner Trust but will speak only
as of the date made.
 
    In the event of a breach of any such representation or warranty with respect
to a Contract that materially and  adversely affects the economic value of  such
Contract  (any such breach being a "Repurchase Event"), TCC, unless it cures the
breach by the  60th day after  the date on  which TCC or  the Depositor  becomes
aware  of or receives written notice from  the Indenture Trustee or the Servicer
of such breach, will be obligated to purchase the Contract from the Owner Trust.
Any such purchase shall be made on  the Business Day preceding the Payment  Date
immediately  following such 60th day at a  price equal to the Contract Principal
Balance applicable  to  such  Contract  (plus  any  delinquent  payments).  This
purchase  obligation may be enforced  by the Indenture Trustee  on behalf of the
holders of the Securities, and will constitute the sole remedy available to  the
Securityholders against TCC for any such uncured breach, except that pursuant to
the  Transfer and Servicing Agreement, TCC will indemnify the Indenture Trustee,
the Owner  Trustee, the  Owner  Trust and  the Securityholders  against  losses,
damages,  liabilities and claims which may be  asserted against any of them as a
result of  third-party claims  arising out  of  the facts  giving rise  to  such
breach.
 
    Upon  the purchase by TCC of a Contract (and related Equipment), the Trustee
will convey such Contract and the related Equipment to TCC.
 
CERTAIN STATISTICS RELATING TO THE INITIAL CONTRACT POOL
 
    GENERAL
 
    The Depositor  has  prepared certain  statistics  relating to  the  pool  of
Contracts which, subject to the exception noted below, will constitute the Final
Contract Pool. These statistics are based on such Contracts as of August 1, 1996
(the  "Initial Determination Date"), and the Final Contract Pool will consist of
such Contracts, less that portion of  the Contract Principal Balances which  are
paid  or prepaid from the  Initial Determination Date to  September 1, 1996 (the
"Cut-Off Date"). Accordingly, the statistics relating to such pool of  Contracts
(the "Initial Contract Pool") will differ somewhat from the Final Contract Pool;
however,  the statistics relating to the Final Contract Pool will be included in
the final Prospectus.
 
    For purpose of  the tables presented  below, all Scheduled  Payments on  the
Contracts  included  in the  Initial Contract  Pool from  and after  the Initial
Determination Date have been discounted monthly at an  assumed rate of    %  per
annum  to calculate an "Imputed Principal  Amount." The Imputed Principal Amount
of the Initial Contract Pool, as of the Initial Determination Date, was $      ,
and the total number of Contracts in the Initial Contract Pool  was            .
Accordingly,  the  average  Imputed Principal  Amount  of the  Contracts  in the
Initial Contract Pool, as of the Initial Determination Date, was $      . Within
the Initial Contract Pool,     % of the Contracts (by Imputed Principal  Amount)
were  originated by the Originators (or by other affiliates  of TCC) and    % of
such Contracts (by Imputed Principal  Amount) were purchased by the  Originators
(or by other affiliates of TCC) from unrelated third parties.
 
                                       35
<PAGE>
    FORM OF CONTRACTS
 
    The  following table  shows the  form of  Contracts included  in the Initial
Contract Pool  by indicating  the  number of  Contracts, the  Imputed  Principal
Amount  of such  Contracts, and  the percentage (by  number of  Contracts and by
Imputed Principal  Amount) of  such Contracts  which are  true Lease  Contracts,
finance Lease Contracts and Loan Contracts:
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                 % OF TOTAL                                 % OF
                                                   NUMBER OF      NUMBER OF          IMPUTED          AGGREGATE IMPUTED
TYPE OF CONTRACT                                   CONTRACTS      CONTRACTS     PRINCIPAL AMOUNT      PRINCIPAL AMOUNT
- -----------------------------------------------  -------------  -------------  -------------------  ---------------------
<S>                                              <C>            <C>            <C>                  <C>
True Leases....................................
Finance Leases.................................
Loans..........................................
</TABLE>
 
    GEOGRAPHICAL DIVERSITY
 
    The following table shows the geographical diversity of the Initial Contract
Pool,  by indicating  the number of  Contracts, the Imputed  Principal Amount of
such Contracts  and  the percentage  (by  number  of Contracts  and  by  Imputed
Principal  Amount)  of such  Contracts  relative to  the  total number,  and the
aggregate Imputed  Principal Amount,  of all  of the  Contracts in  the  Initial
Contract  Pool by reference to the State in which the Equipment relating to such
Contracts is located:
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                           % OF AGGREGATE
                               % OF TOTAL      IMPUTED        IMPUTED                                     % OF TOTAL      IMPUTED
                NUMBER OF      NUMBER OF      PRINCIPAL      PRINCIPAL                     NUMBER OF      NUMBER OF      PRINCIPAL
   STATE        CONTRACTS      CONTRACTS        AMOUNT         AMOUNT         STATE        CONTRACTS      CONTRACTS        AMOUNT
- ------------  -------------  --------------  ------------  --------------  ------------  -------------  --------------  ------------
 
<S>           <C>            <C>             <C>           <C>             <C>           <C>            <C>             <C>
 
<CAPTION>
              % OF AGGREGATE
                 IMPUTED
                PRINCIPAL
   STATE          AMOUNT
- ------------  --------------
<S>           <C>
</TABLE>
 
    CONTRACTS BY EQUIPMENT TYPE
 
    The following  table  shows the  type  of Equipment  securing  or  otherwise
related  to  the  Contracts in  the  Initial  Contract Pool,  by  the  number of
Contracts, the Imputed Principal  Amount of such  Contracts, and the  percentage
(by  number of Contracts and by percentage  of Imputed Principal Amount) of such
Contracts relative  to the  total number,  and the  aggregate Imputed  Principal
Amount, of all of the Contracts in the Initial Contract Pool:
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                                      % OF AGGREGATE
                                                              % OF TOTAL         IMPUTED PRINCIPAL   IMPUTED PRINCIPAL
TYPE OF EQUIPMENT                 NUMBER OF CONTRACTS    NUMBER OF CONTRACTS          AMOUNT              AMOUNT
- -------------------------------  ---------------------  ----------------------  -------------------  -----------------
 
<S>                              <C>                    <C>                     <C>                  <C>
</TABLE>
 
                                       36
<PAGE>
    IMPUTED PRINCIPAL AMOUNT AND NUMBER OF CONTRACTS
 
    The  following  table shows  the Imputed  Principal  Amount of  Contracts in
various ranges in the Initial Contract Pool  by the number of Contracts and  the
Imputed  Principal Amount,  and the  percentage (by  number of  Contracts and by
Imputed Principal Amount) of  such Contracts relative to  the total number,  and
the  aggregate Imputed Principal Amount, of all  of the Contracts in the Initial
Contract Pool:
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                                      % OF AGGREGATE
IMPUTED PRINCIPAL AMOUNT OF                                   % OF TOTAL         IMPUTED PRINCIPAL   IMPUTED PRINCIPAL
         CONTRACTS                NUMBER OF CONTRACTS    NUMBER OF CONTRACTS          AMOUNT              AMOUNT
- -------------------------------  ---------------------  ----------------------  -------------------  -----------------
<S>                              <C>                    <C>                     <C>                  <C>
$      to $      ..............
$      to $      ..............
$      to $      ..............
</TABLE>
 
    TERMS OF CONTRACTS
 
    The following table shows the remaining term of the Contracts in the Initial
Contract Pool from the  Initial Determination Date  to the scheduled  expiration
date  of  such Contracts,  by indicating  the number  of Contracts,  the Imputed
Principal Amount of such Contracts, and  the percentage (by number of  Contracts
and by Imputed Principal Amount) of such Contracts relative to the total number,
and  the aggregate  Imputed Principal  Amount, of  all of  the Contracts  in the
Initial Contract Pool:
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                              NUMBER                                                   % OF AGGREGATE
                                                OF             % OF TOTAL         IMPUTED PRINCIPAL   IMPUTED PRINCIPAL
REMAINING TERM OF CONTRACTS                  CONTRACTS    NUMBER OF CONTRACTS          AMOUNT              AMOUNT
- ------------------------------------------  -----------  ----------------------  -------------------  -----------------
<S>                                         <C>          <C>                     <C>                  <C>
One Month to    Months....................
  Months to   Months......................
  Months to   Months......................
  Months to   Months......................
Over   Months.............................
</TABLE>
 
                                       37
<PAGE>
    TYPES OF CONTRACTS
 
    The following table shows the types of Obligor which have executed Contracts
within the  Initial Contract  Pool,  by the  number  of Contracts,  the  Imputed
Principal  Amount of such Contracts, and  the percentage (by number of Contracts
and by Imputed Principal Amount) of such Contracts relative to the total number,
and the  aggregate Imputed  Principal Amount,  of all  of the  Contracts in  the
Initial Contract Pool:
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                                      % OF AGGREGATE
                                                              % OF TOTAL         IMPUTED PRINCIPAL   IMPUTED PRINCIPAL
TYPE OF OBLIGOR                   NUMBER OF CONTRACTS    NUMBER OF CONTRACTS          AMOUNT              AMOUNT
- -------------------------------  ---------------------  ----------------------  -------------------  -----------------
<S>                              <C>                    <C>                     <C>                  <C>
</TABLE>
 
CERTAIN STATISTICS RELATING TO DELINQUENCIES AND DEFAULTS
 
    DELINQUENCIES
 
    The following table sets forth statistics relating to Delinquencies on lease
and/or loan contracts within the Originators' portfolios (on an aggregate basis)
as  of December  31, 1991,  December 31, 1992,  December 31,  1993, December 31,
1994, December 31, 1995 and June  30, 1996. For these purposes, a  "Delinquency"
means  that the  obligor on  the lease  or loan  contract has  failed to  make a
required payment in an amount  equal to at least 90%  of the required amount  on
the  date required and  for a specified  period thereafter (which  period is set
forth below). For these purposes, any payment made by the obligor on a lease  or
loan contract subsequent to the required payment date is applied to the earliest
payment  which was unpaid. The  statistics set forth below  relate to the entire
portfolio of lease and loan contracts serviced by the Originators as of the date
specified, and not to the Contracts in  either the Initial Contract Pool or  the
Final Contract Pool; and, accordingly, such statistics should not necessarily be
considered  indicative of the  future performance of the  Contracts in the Final
Contract Pool. The following table is based, where indicated, on the book  value
of  the lease and loan contracts, as it appears on the accounting records of TCC
as of the date set forth below.
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                 PERCENTAGE OF AGGREGATE BOOK VALUE OF CONTRACTS WHICH
                                                                                    WERE DELINQUENT
                                                AGGREGATE BOOK   ------------------------------------------------------
                                                   VALUE OF        31 TO 60      61 TO 90     91 TO 120      OVER 120
DATE OF CALCULATION                               CONTRACTS          DAYS          DAYS          DAYS          DAYS
- ---------------------------------------------  ----------------  ------------  ------------  ------------  ------------
<S>                                            <C>               <C>           <C>           <C>           <C>
12/31/91.....................................    $                         %             %             %             %
12/31/92.....................................    $                         %             %             %             %
12/31/93.....................................    $                         %             %             %             %
12/31/94.....................................    $                         %             %             %             %
12/31/95.....................................    $                         %             %             %             %
 6/30/96.....................................    $                         %             %             %             %
</TABLE>
 
    DEFAULTS
 
    The following  table sets  forth statistics  relating to  Defaults on  lease
and/or loan contracts within the Originators' portfolios (on an aggregate basis)
as  of, and  for the  12-month periods ending,  December 31,  1991, December 31,
1992, December 31, 1993, December 31, 1994, December 31, 1995 and as of, and for
the six-month period  ending, June  30, 1996.  For these  purposes, a  "Default"
means that,
 
                                       38
<PAGE>
during  such 12-month period, the obligor on the relevant lease or loan contract
failed to make  payments in  an amount  at least equal  to 90%  of the  required
amount for at least 90 days beyond the date required, or commenced bankruptcy or
insolvency proceeding, and in either event that the applicable Originator or TCC
declared  a default under  such lease or  loan contract and  pursued one or more
remedies thereunder. The statistics set forth  below relate to the portfolio  of
lease and/or loan contracts serviced by the Originators for the period specified
and  not  to the  Contracts in  either the  Initial Contract  Pool or  the Final
Contract Pool;  and,  accordingly, such  statistics  should not  necessarily  be
considered as indicative of the future performance of the Contracts in the Final
Contract  Pool. The following table is based, where indicated, on the book value
of the lease and loan contracts  as it appears on the  records of TCC as of  the
date specified below:
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                        AGGREGATE BOOK           PERCENTAGE OF
                                                                     VALUE OF CONTRACTS IN  AGGREGATE BOOK VALUE OF
                                                                         ORIGINATORS'        CONTRACTS WHICH WERE
DATE OF CALCULATION                                                        PORTFOLIO               DEFAULTED
- -------------------------------------------------------------------  ---------------------  -----------------------
<S>                                                                  <C>                    <C>
12/31/91...........................................................      $                                 %
12/31/92...........................................................      $                                 %
12/31/93...........................................................      $                                 %
12/31/94...........................................................      $                                 %
12/31/95...........................................................      $                                 %
 6/30/96...........................................................      $                                 %
</TABLE>
 
    LOSSES AND RECOVERIES
 
    The  following  table sets  forth statistics  relating  to gross  losses and
losses net  of recoveries  on  Defaulted lease  and  loan contracts  within  the
Originators'  portfolios  (on an  aggregate  basis) during  the  12-month period
ending December 31,  1991, December 31,  1992, December 31,  1993, December  31,
1994 and December 31, 1995 and during the six-month period ending June 30, 1996.
For  these purposes,  "gross losses"  means                , and  "losses net of
recoveries" means              . The  statistics set forth  below relate to  the
portfolio  of lease  and loan contracts  serviced by the  Originators during the
period indicated and not to the Contracts in either the Initial Contract Pool or
the  Final  Contract  Pool;  and,   accordingly,  such  statistics  should   not
necessarily  be considered indicative of the future performance of the Contracts
in the Final Contract Pool.
 
                               [TABLE TO FOLLOW]
 
                                       39
<PAGE>
                            DESCRIPTION OF THE NOTES
 
GENERAL
 
    The  Notes will be issued pursuant to the  terms of the Indenture, a form of
which has been filed as an exhibit to the Registration Statement. A copy of  the
Indenture will be filed with the Commission following the issuance of the Notes.
The  following summary describes  certain terms of the  Notes and the Indenture.
The summary does not purport to be complete and is subject to, and is  qualified
in  its  entirety by  reference  to, all  the provisions  of  the Notes  and the
Indenture.                   , a national  banking association headquartered  in
              , will be the Indenture Trustee.
 
    The  Owner Trust  will issue  $        aggregate  principal amount  of     %
Receivable-Backed Notes,  Class A  (the "Class  A  Notes"), $          aggregate
principal amount of    % Receivable-Backed Notes, Class B (the "Class B Notes"),
and  $      aggregate principal amount  of    % Receivable-Backed Notes, Class C
(the "Class C  Notes"), pursuant to  the Indenture.  The Class A  Notes will  be
senior  in right of payment  to the Class B  and Class C Notes,  and the Class B
Notes will be senior in right of payment  to the Class C Notes. The Owner  Trust
will  also issue two classes of  certificates of beneficial interest, the Equity
Certificates and the Equipment Certificate, which are not being offered  hereby.
The  Equipment  Certificate  will represent  an  undivided interest  in,  and be
payable solely from, certain amounts derived from the sale or other  disposition
of  the Equipment related to the  Contracts that constitute Lease Contracts upon
expiration or termination  (including an  early termination  or liquidation)  of
such  Lease Contracts  and certain  other amounts  as described  herein. Amounts
payable on  the Equipment  Certificate  will not  be  available for  payment  of
interest and principal on the Notes. It is expected that the Equity Certificates
will  initially represent the right  to receive principal in  an amount equal to
approximately 4% of the Cut-Off  Date Contract Pool Principal Balance,  together
with interest thereon at    % per annum.
 
    Payments  on the Notes will be made by the Indenture Trustee on each Payment
Date to persons in whose names the Notes are registered as of the related Record
Date (the "Holders" or  "Noteholders"). The Payment Date  for the Notes will  be
the     day of each  month (or if  such    day is  not a Business  Day, the next
succeeding Business Day), commencing  in October 1996. The  Record Date for  any
Payment Date will be the Business Day immediately preceding the Payment Date (so
long as the Notes are held in the book-entry form), or the last day of the prior
calendar month (if Definitive Notes have been issued).
 
    A  "Business Day"  is any day  (other than  a Saturday and  Sunday) on which
commercial banks in New  York City, London and             are open for  regular
business.
 
    Each Class of Notes initially will be represented by Notes registered in the
name  of the nominee of DTC (together  with any successor depository selected by
the Indenture Trustee (the "Depository"), except as set forth below.  Beneficial
interests  in each  Class of  Notes will  be available  for purchase  in minimum
denominations of $1,000 and  integral multiples of $1,000  in excess thereof  in
book-entry  form only. The Depositor has been informed by DTC that DTC's nominee
will be Cede  & Co.  Accordingly, Cede &  Co. is  expected to be  the Holder  of
record  of the  Notes. Unless  and until Definitive  Notes are  issued under the
limited circumstances described herein, no  Note Owner acquiring an interest  in
any  Class of Notes will be entitled  to receive a certificate representing such
Note Owner's interest in such Notes.  Until such time, all references herein  to
actions  by Noteholders of any Class of Notes will refer to actions taken by the
Depository upon  instructions  from  its  participating  organizations  and  all
references   herein  to  distributions,  notices,   reports  and  statements  to
Noteholders of any Class of Notes will refer to distributions, notices,  reports
and statements to the Depository or its nominee, as the registered Holder of the
Notes of such Class, for distribution to Note Owners of such Class in accordance
with  the  Depository's procedures.  See  "-- Book-Entry  Registration"  and "--
Definitive Notes."
 
DISTRIBUTIONS
 
    Principal of and interest  on the Notes  will be paid  on each Payment  Date
solely  from, and secured by, the Amount  Available for such Payment Date, which
is (1)  the sum  of (a)  those Pledged  Revenues on  deposit in  the  Collection
Account  as of  the last  Business Day  preceding such  Payment Date  which were
 
                                       40
<PAGE>
(i) received  by or  on behalf  of the  Indenture Trustee  during the  preceding
calendar month (the "Collection Period"), or (ii) to the extent necessary to pay
interest on the Notes and the Equity Certificates on such Payment Date, received
by  or on behalf of the Indenture Trustee after such Collection Period, plus (b)
amounts permitted to be withdrawn therefor from the Cash Collateral Account,  as
described  under  "--  Cash  Collateral Account"  below,  less  (2)  the amounts
described in clauses (i) and (ii) of the following paragraph. "Pledged Revenues"
will consist of (i) "Scheduled Payments" on the Contracts (which will consist of
all payments under  the Contracts  other than  those portions  of such  payments
which,  under  such Contracts,  are to  be (A)  applied by  the Servicer  to the
payment of insurance premiums, maintenance, taxes and other similar obligations,
or (B) retained by the Servicer  in payment of Administrative Fees, received  on
or  after the Cut-Off Date  (including all Scheduled Payments  due prior to, but
not received as of, the Cut-Off  Date, but excluding any Scheduled Payments  due
on or after, but received prior to, the Cut-Off Date) and due during the term of
the  Contracts (without giving  effect to extensions  or renewals thereof); (ii)
any voluntary prepayments ("Prepayments") received on or after the Cut-Off  Date
under  the Contracts,  which, in  the case  of Prepayments  received under Lease
Contracts, will  not  exceed  the  Contract  Principal  Balance  of  such  Lease
Contracts (after application of the current month's Scheduled Payment), plus the
current  month's Scheduled Payment and  any delinquent Scheduled Payments; (iii)
any amounts paid by TCC to purchase Contracts due to a breach of representations
and warranties or by the Depositor to purchase the Contracts, as described under
"-- Optional Purchase of Contracts" below, (iv) certain of the proceeds  derived
from  the liquidation  of the  related Equipment  (net of  liquidation expenses)
under any defaulted Contracts, as described under "-- Contract Defaults"  below;
and  (v) any earnings  on the investment  of amounts credited  to the Collection
Account.
 
    On each Payment  Date, the Indenture  Trustee will be  required to make  the
following  payments, first, from  Pledged Revenues on  deposit in the Collection
Account as  of the  last Business  Day preceding  such Payment  Date which  were
received  by or on behalf of the Trustee during the preceding Collection Period,
second, to the  extent the foregoing  Pledged Revenues are  insufficient to  pay
interest  on the Notes  and the Equity  Certificiates on such  Payment Date, the
amount necessary to cure such deficiency from Pledged Revenues on deposit in the
Collection Account as of the last Business Day preceding such Payment Date which
were received by  or on  behalf of the  Trustee after  the preceding  Collection
Period,  and, thereafter (but only  as to amounts described  in clause (iii) and
certain amounts included in clause (iv)), from amounts permitted to be withdrawn
from the Cash Collateral Account as described under "-- Cash Collateral Account"
below, in the following order of priority:
 
     (i)
       the Servicing Fee and  any other amounts then  due and payable under  the
       Transfer  and  Servicing  Agreement  in  connection  with  servicing  the
       Contracts;
 
     (ii)
       the fees and expenses of the Indenture Trustee and the Owner Trustee then
       due and payable;
 
     (iii)
       interest on the Notes and the Equity Certificates in the following  order
       of priority:
 
       (a) interest  on the  Class A Notes  (including any  overdue interest and
           interest thereon),
 
       (b) interest on the  Class B  Notes (including any  overdue interest  and
           interest thereon),
 
       (c) interest  on the  Class C Notes  (including any  overdue interest and
           interest thereon),
 
       (d) interest on the Equity  Certificates (including any overdue  interest
           and interest thereon);
 
    (iv)
       an amount equal to the Monthly Principal Amount, as of such Payment Date,
       in  respect of principal on the Notes  and the Equity Certificates in the
       priority described under "-- Principal" below; and
 
     (v)
       the remainder to the Cash Collateral Account, to be applied in the manner
       described under "-- Cash Collateral Account" below.
 
CLASS A INTEREST
 
    Interest will be paid to  the Holders of the Class  A Notes on each  Payment
Date,  to the extent the  Amount Available (after taking  into account any prior
applications described under "-- Distributions"
 
                                       41
<PAGE>
above) is  sufficient  therefor,  at the  Class  A  Interest Rate  on  the  then
outstanding  Class A Principal Balance, and will be calculated on the basis of a
360-day year consisting of twelve 30-day  months. Such interest so paid on  such
Payment  Date will  be equal to  one-twelfth of the  product of (i)  the Class A
Interest Rate  and  (ii)  the  related  Class A  Principal  Balance  as  of  the
immediately  preceding Payment  Date (after giving  effect to  reductions in the
related Class A Principal Balance  on such immediately preceding Payment  Date).
Interest on the Class A Notes will accrue from and including September   , 1996,
to  but excluding [October]  , 1996 (in  the case of the first interest period),
and thereafter from and including the most recent Payment Date on which interest
has been paid, to but excluding the following Payment Date.
 
    In the event that, on a particular Payment Date, the Amount Available is not
sufficient to make a full distribution of interest to the Holders of the Class A
Notes, the amount  of such  deficiency, together  with interest  thereon at  the
Class  A Interest  Rate, to the  extent permitted by  law, will be  added to the
amount such Holders will be entitled to receive as interest on the next  Payment
Date.
 
CLASS B INTEREST
 
    Interest  will be paid to  the Holders of the Class  B Notes on each Payment
Date, to the extent  the remaining Amount Available  (after taking into  account
any  prior applications described under  "-- Distributions" above) is sufficient
therefor, at the Class B Interest Rate on the then outstanding Class B Principal
Balance, and will be  calculated on the  basis of a  360-day year consisting  of
twelve  30-day months. Such interest so paid  on such Payment Date will be equal
to one-twelfth of  the product of  (i) the Class  B Interest Rate  and (ii)  the
Class  B Principal Balance  as of the immediately  preceding Payment Date (after
giving effect to reductions in the Class B Principal Balance on such immediately
preceding Payment Date).  Interest on  the Class B  Notes will  accrue from  and
including  September   , 1996, to but excluding  October  , 1996 (in the case of
the first interest period),  and thereafter from and  including the most  recent
Payment  Date on which  interest has been  paid, to but  excluding the following
Payment Date.
 
    In the  event that,  on  a particular  Payment  Date, the  remaining  Amount
Available  is not  sufficient to  make a  full distribution  of interest  to the
Holders of Class B Notes, the amount of such deficiency, together with  interest
thereon  at the Class B  Interest Rate, to the extent  permitted by law, will be
carried forward and added to the amount such Holders will be entitled to receive
as interest on the next Payment Date.
 
CLASS C INTEREST
 
    Interest will be paid to  the Holders of the Class  C Notes on each  Payment
Date,  to the extent  the remaining Amount Available  (after taking into account
any prior applications described under  "-- Distributions" above) is  sufficient
therefor, at the Class C Interest Rate on the then outstanding Class C Principal
Balance,  and will be  calculated on the  basis of a  360-day year consisting of
twelve 30-day months. Such interest so paid  on such Payment Date will be  equal
to  one-twelfth of the  product of (i) the  Class C Interest  Rate, and (ii) the
Class C Principal Balance  as of the immediately  preceding Payment Date  (after
giving effect to reductions in the Class C Principal Balance on such immediately
preceding  Payment Date).  Interest on  the Class C  Notes will  accrue from and
including September  , 1996 to but excluding October  , 1996 (in the case of the
first interest  period),  and thereafter  from  and including  the  most  recent
Payment  Date on which  interest has been  paid, to but  excluding the following
Payment Date.
 
    In the  event that,  on  a particular  Payment  Date, the  remaining  Amount
Available  is not  sufficient to  make a  full distribution  of interest  to the
Holders of Class C Notes, the amount of such deficiency, together with  interest
thereon  at the Class C  Interest Rate, to the extent  permitted by law, will be
carried forward and added to the amount such Holders will be entitled to receive
as interest on the next Payment Date.
 
                                       42
<PAGE>
PRINCIPAL
 
    To the extent the remaining Amount Available (after taking into account  any
prior  applications  described  under "--  Distributions"  above)  is sufficient
therefor, the amount of principal to be  paid on the Notes on each Payment  Date
will  equal the Monthly Principal Amount. Principal payable on the Notes will be
paid in respect  of the Class  A Notes on  each Payment Date  until the Class  A
Principal  Balance has been reduced to zero, then in respect of principal on the
Class B Notes until the Class B Principal Balance has been reduced to zero,  and
then  in respect of principal  on the Class C Notes  until the Class C Principal
Balance has been reduced to zero. Commencing on the first Payment Date, however,
   % of the Monthly Principal Amount will be payable on the Equity  Certificates
until the aggregate amount so paid equals $         .
 
    The  "Monthly  Principal Amount"  for any  Payment Date  will equal  (i) the
difference between (a) the aggregate of  the Contract Principal Balances of  the
Contracts  (the "Contract  Pool Principal  Balance") as of  the last  day of the
second preceding calendar month, and (b) the Contract Pool Principal Balance  as
of  the last day of the immediately preceding calendar month (or, in the case of
the first Payment Date, the Cut-Off Date Contract Pool Principal Balance),  plus
(ii)  any portion of the Monthly Principal Amount for the prior Payment Date not
distributed in respect of principal on the Notes or the Equity Certificates,  as
appropriate, on such prior Payment Date. The "Contract Principal Balance" of any
Contract  as of the last day of any calendar month is (1) in the case of a Lease
Contract, the present value of the  unpaid Scheduled Payments due on such  Lease
Contract  after such last day  of the calendar month,  discounted monthly at the
rate of    % per annum, and (2) in the case of any other Contract, the remaining
scheduled principal balance of  such Contract after  giving effect to  Scheduled
Payments  due on or prior  to such last day of  the calendar month. The Contract
Principal Balance  of any  Contract which,  during a  calendar month,  became  a
Liquidated  Contract or was purchased by TCC  due to a breach of representations
and warranties, will  be deemed to  be zero on  and after the  last day of  such
calendar  month. A  "Liquidated Contract"  is any  Contract (a)  with respect to
which the Servicer  has repossessed and  disposed of the  related Equipment,  or
otherwise  collected  all proceeds  which, in  the  Servicer's judgment,  can be
collected under such Contract, or (b) which is delinquent 180 days or more.
 
SPECIAL REDEMPTION OF THE NOTES
 
    If the Merger has not been consummated, or the Servicer has not executed the
Transfer and Servicing Agreement, by September   , 1996, all of the Notes  shall
be  redeemed and  paid in full  on September    , 1996  (the "Special Redemption
Date") at a redemption price (the "Special Redemption Price") which is equal  to
(i)  in respect of any Class of Notes,  the initial offering price of such Class
of Notes as shown  on the cover  page of this Prospectus  plus (ii) interest  on
such  initial  offering price  from  (and including)  the  Closing Date  to (but
excluding) the  Special Redemption  Date, at  the  rate of  10% per  annum.  The
Special  Redemption Price will be paid from  the proceeds of the issuance of the
Notes and the Equity Certificates and  additional cash on deposit in the  Escrow
Account  held by the Indenture Trustee pursuant  to the Indenture, which will be
funded on the Closing Date in an amount at least equal to the aggregate  Special
Redemption  Price. If  the Merger is  consummated on or  prior to September    ,
1996, the Trust  Assets will be  deposited by the  Depositor with the  Indenture
Trustee,  on behalf of the Owner Trust,  on the Merger Consummation Date and the
amounts on deposit in the Escrow Account will be paid over to the Depositor.
 
    In the event of a Special Redemption, for so long as the Notes are listed on
the Luxembourg Stock Exchange, the Servicer shall provide public notice of  such
redemption in Luxembourg by publication in a newspaper of general publication in
Luxembourg,  expected  to  be  the "Luxembourg  Wort,"  as  soon  as practicable
following the Special Redemption  Date but in no  event more than five  Business
Days thereafter.
 
SUBORDINATION OF CLASS B AND CLASS C NOTES AND EQUITY CERTIFICATES
 
    The  likelihood  of payment  of  interest on  each  Class of  Notes  will be
enhanced by  the application  of the  Amount Available  to the  payment of  such
interest  prior to the  payment of principal on  any of the  Notes or the Equity
Certificates, as well as by  the preferential right of  the Holders of Notes  of
each such
 
                                       43
<PAGE>
Class  to receive such interest (1)  in the case of the  Class A Notes, prior to
the payment of  any interest  on the Class  B Notes,  the Class C  Notes or  the
Equity  Certificates, (2) in the case of the Class B Notes, prior to the payment
of any interest on the Class C Notes or the Equity Certificates, and (3) in  the
case  of the Class C Notes,  prior to the payment of  any interest on the Equity
Certificates. Likewise, the likelihood of payment of principal on each Class  of
Notes will be enhanced by the preferential right of the Holders of Notes of each
such  Class to  receive such  principal, to the  extent of  the Amount Available
after payment of interest on the Notes and the Equity Certificates as aforesaid,
(i) in the case of the Class A  Notes, prior to the payment of any principal  on
the  Class  B  Notes,  the Class  C  Notes  or (except  as  described  under "--
Principal" above)  the Equity  Certificates, (ii)  in the  case of  the Class  B
Notes,  prior to the payment of any principal on the Class C Notes or (except as
described under "-- Principal" above) the Equity Certificates, and (iii) in  the
case  of the Class C Notes, prior to  the payment of any principal on the Equity
Certificates, except as described under "-- Principal" above.
 
CASH COLLATERAL ACCOUNT
 
    The Cash Collateral Account  will be established on  or prior to the  Merger
Consummation Date and will thereafter be available to the Indenture Trustee. The
Cash Collateral Account will be funded in an amount equal to    % of the Cut-Off
Date  Contract Pool Principal Balance ($      ). Amounts on deposit from time to
time in the  Cash Collateral  Account (up  to, but not  in then  excess of)  the
Requisite  Amount described below, and not  including any investment earnings on
such funds)  shall  be used,  to  the extent  that  amounts on  deposit  in  the
Collection  Account  as of  any  Payment Date  are  insufficient to  do  so (and
provided that any  such deficiency  has resulted, directly  or indirectly,  from
delinquencies  and/ or defaults  on the Contracts),  (i) to pay  interest on the
Notes and  the Equity  Certificates  in the  following  order of  priority:  (a)
interest  on  the Class  A Notes  (including any  overdue interest  and interest
thereon, (b) interest on the Class  B Notes (including any overdue interest  and
interest  thereon,  (c) interest  on the  Class C  Notes (including  any overdue
interest and  interest thereon,  then (d)  interest on  the Equity  Certificates
(including any overdue interest and interest thereon), (ii) to pay any Principal
Deficiency  Amount (equal to  the lesser of  (a) the Current  Realized Losses on
Liquidated Contracts for  the related Collection  Period or (b)  the excess,  if
any,   of  the  aggregate  Principal  Balance   of  the  Notes  and  the  Equity
Certificates, over the Contract Pool Principal Balance as of the last day of the
related Collection Period plus all  delinquent Scheduled Payments in respect  of
principal),  and (iii) to pay principal on  the Notes and Equity Certificates at
the applicable Stated Maturity Date thereof. "Current Realized Losses" means, as
to any Liquidated Contract,  the excess, if any,  of (1) the Contract  Principal
Balance  of such  Contract (after application  of the  current month's Scheduled
Payment),  plus  the  current  month's  Scheduled  Payment  and  all  delinquent
payments,  all  determined as  of  the month  in  which such  Contract  became a
Liquidated Contract, over (2) the proceeds (net of liquidation expenses) of  the
liquidation  of  such  Contract  (which,  as  to  such  proceeds  received upoon
disposition of the related Equipment under  a Lease Contract, will include  only
that  portion  thereof allocable  to the  Notes and  the Equity  Certificates as
described under "-- Contract Defaults" below).
 
    If and to  the extent  that the  amount on  deposit in  the Cash  Collateral
Account  as of  any Payment  Date is  less than  the Requisite  Amount (which is
defined as being an amount equal  to $       , subject to certain  adjustments),
then  such deficiency  is to  be restored  from the  remaining Amount Available,
after payment of interest and principal on the Notes and the Equity Certificates
as described under "-- Distributions" above.  Any amount on deposit in the  Cash
Collateral  Account  in  excess  of the  Requisite  Amount,  and  all investment
earnings on funds in the Cash Collateral Account, will be released from the Cash
Collateral Account and paid to or upon the order of the Depositor, and will  not
be available to make payments on the Notes or the Equity Certificates.
 
    The  Cash  Collateral Account  must  be an  Eligible  Account, and  funds on
deposit in the Cash Collateral Account will be invested in Eligible  Investments
(each as defined under "-- Trust Accounts" below).
 
                                       44
<PAGE>
CONTRACT DEFAULTS
 
    Proceeds  from the disposition  of the Equipment  subject to Lease Contracts
will not be available to make payments on the Notes or the Equity  Certificates,
except  in the event of a default thereunder.  In the event of a default under a
Lease Contract, the proceeds derived from  the sale or other disposition of  the
related  Equipment (net of liquidation expenses) will be allocated on a pro rata
basis between the Equipment Certificate, on the one hand, and the Notes and  the
Equity  Certificates, on the other, based respectively  on (a) the Book Value of
the Equipment (which  is equal to  the value of  the Equipment as  shown on  the
accounting books and records of TCC as of the Cut-Off Date) and (b) the Contract
Principal  Balance  of  the related  Lease  Contract (after  application  of the
current month's Scheduled Payment), plus  the current month's Scheduled  Payment
and  any delinquent payments, all determined as  of the month of liquidation. In
no event will the Notes or the  Equity Certificates be entitled to receive  more
than  the  Contract  Principal  Balance (plus  the  current  and  any delinquent
Scheduled Payments) from the  proceeds of a defaulted  Lease Contract. All  such
liquidation  proceeds from a defaulted Lease Contract and allocable to the Notes
and the Equity Certificates, together with all proceeds of the liquidation of  a
defaulted  Loan Contract (net of liquidation expenses), will be deposited in the
Collection Account and constitute part of the Amount Available to be applied  to
the  payment of interest and principal on  the Notes and the Equity Certificates
in accordance with the priorities described under "-- Distributions" above.
 
OPTIONAL PURCHASE OF CONTRACTS
 
    The Depositor  may  purchase  all  of the  Contracts  on  any  Payment  Date
following  the date on which  the unpaid principal balance  of the Notes and the
Equity Certificates is equal to  10% or less of  the Cut-Off Date Contract  Pool
Principal  Balance.  The  purchase price  to  be  paid in  connection  with such
purchase shall be equal  to the unpaid  principal balance of  the Notes and  the
Equity  Certificates as  of such Payment  Date plus  interest to be  paid on the
Notes and the Equity Certificates on such  Payment Date, plus the Book Value  of
the  Equipment. The proceeds of  such purchase shall be  applied on such Payment
Date (1) as to such proceeds in  respect of principal and interest on the  Notes
and  the Equity Certificates, to the  payment of the remaining principal balance
on the Notes and  the Equity Certificates, together  with interest thereon,  and
(2)  as  to the  balance of  such proceeds,  to  the payment  of amounts  on the
Equipment Certificate.
 
TRUST ACCOUNTS
 
    The Indenture  Trustee  will  establish and  maintain  under  the  Indenture
segregated  trust accounts (which need not  be deposit accounts, but which shall
constitute "Eligible Accounts"), consisting of the "Collection Account" and  the
"Escrow  Account."  An "Eligible  Account"  means any  account  which is  (i) an
account maintained  with an  Eligible Institution  (as defined  below); (ii)  an
account  or accounts the deposits in which  are fully insured by either the Bank
Insurance Fund or the  Savings Association Insurance Fund  of the FDIC; (iii)  a
"segregated  trust account" maintained with the  corporate trust department of a
federal or state chartered  depository institution or  trust company with  trust
powers  and acting in  its fiduciary capacity  for the benefit  of the Indenture
Trustee, which depository institution or  trust company has capital and  surplus
(or,  if such depository institution or trust  company is a subsidiary of a bank
holding company system, the capital and surplus of the bank holding company)  of
not  less than $50,000,000 and the  securities of such depository institution or
trust company  (or,  if  such  depository institution  or  trust  company  is  a
subsidiary of a bank holding company system and such depository institution's or
trust  company's securities  are not rated,  the securities of  the bank holding
company) have a credit rating from each of Moody's, S&P (if rated by S&P), Fitch
(if rated by Fitch) and Duff & Phelps (if rated by Duff & Phelps) in one of  its
generic  credit rating categories  which signifies investment  grade; or (iv) an
account that will not cause Moody's, S&P, Fitch or Duff & Phelps to downgrade or
withdraw its then-current rating assigned to the Notes, as confirmed in  writing
by  Moody's,  S&P, Fitch  and Duff  & Phelps.  "Eligible Institution"  means any
depository institution organized  under the  laws of  the United  States or  any
state,  the deposits of which are insured to the full extent permitted by law by
the Bank Insurance Fund (currently administered by the Federal Deposit Insurance
Corporation), whole short-term deposits have been  rated P-1 by Moody's, A-1  by
S&P, F-1 by Fitch (if rated by Fitch) and
 
                                       45
<PAGE>
by  Duff &  Phelps (if rated  by Duff &  Phelps), or  in one of  the two highest
rating categories by Moody's, S&P, Fitch (if  rated by Fitch) and Duff &  Phelps
(if  rated by Duff & Phelps) in the  case of unsecured long-term debt, and which
is subject to supervision and examination  by federal or state authorities.  The
Servicer,  as  agent  for the  Indenture  Trustee, may  designate,  or otherwise
arrange for the  purchase by the  Indenture Trustee of,  investments to be  made
with   funds  in  the  Trust  Accounts,  which  investments  shall  be  Eligible
Investments (as defined in  the Indenture) that will  mature not later than  the
business day preceding the applicable monthly Payment Date. Eligible Investments
include,  among other  investments, obligations of  the United States  or of any
agency thereof backed by the full faith and credit of the United States; federal
funds, certificates of deposit, time  deposits and bankers' acceptances sold  by
eligible  financial  institutions; certain  repurchase agreements  with eligible
institutions; corporate securities assigned  at least an  Aa rating by  Moody's,
the  highest rating by S&P, in one of the two highest rating categories by Fitch
(if rated by Fitch) and    by Duff & Phelps (if rated by Duff & Phelps), not  in
excess  of 10% of amounts in such Trust  Account at the time of such investment;
commercial paper assigned at  least a P-1  rating by Moody's,  an A-1 rating  by
S&P,   an  F-1+   rating  by   Fitch  (if   rated  by   Fitch)  and   a
rating by  Duff &  Phelps  (if rated  by Duff  &  Phelps) at  the time  of  such
investment;  and shares  of a  registered investment  company, whose  shares are
registered under the Securities Act of 1933  and which are rated by Moody's,  by
S&P,  by Fitch  (if rated by  Fitch) and by  Duff &  Phelps (if rated  by Duff &
Phelps) in their respective highest rating category.
 
REPORTS TO NOTEHOLDERS
 
    The Servicer  will  furnish to  the  Indenture Trustee,  and  the  Indenture
Trustee  will include  with each  distribution to  a Noteholder,  a statement in
respect of the related Payment Date setting forth, among other things:
 
           (i)
           the amount  of interest  paid on  the Class  A Notes,  including  any
           unpaid interest from the prior Payment Date, and any remaining unpaid
           interest on the Class A Notes;
 
          (ii)
           the  amount  of interest  paid on  the Class  B Notes,  including any
           unpaid interest from the prior Payment Date, and any remaining unpaid
           interest on the Class B Notes;
 
         (iii)
           the amount  of interest  paid on  the Class  C Notes,  including  any
           unpaid interest from the prior Payment Date, and any remaining unpaid
           interest on the Class C Notes;
 
          (iv)
           the amount of principal paid on the Class A Notes;
 
           (v)
           the amount of principal paid on the Class B Notes;
 
          (vi)
           the amount of principal paid on the Class C Notes;
 
         (vii)
           the Principal Deficiency Amount, if any, for such Payment Date;
 
        (viii)
           the  amount of  interest and  principal (if  any) paid  on the Equity
           Certificates; and
 
          (ix)
           the Requisite Amount of the Cash Collateral Account and the amount on
           deposit in the Cash  Collateral Account (after  giving effect to  any
           deposits and withdrawals to be made on the Payment Date).
 
    The  Notes will be registered in the name  of DTC and will not be registered
in the names of the beneficial owners or their nominees. As a result, unless and
until definitive, fully registered Notes are issued in the limited circumstances
described under  "-- Definitive  Notes"  below, beneficial  owners will  not  be
recognized  by the Indenture Trustee as Noteholders, as that term is used in the
Indenture. Hence, until such  time, beneficial owners  will receive reports  and
other  information provided  for under  the Indenture only  if, when  and to the
extent provided by DTC and its participating organizations.
 
                                       46
<PAGE>
BOOK-ENTRY REGISTRATION
 
    With respect to each Class of Notes in book-entry form, Noteholders may hold
their Notes through DTC (in  the United States) or  Cedel Bank or Euroclear  (in
Europe),  which  in turn  hold through  DTC,  if they  are participants  of such
systems  ("Participants"),  or   indirectly  through   organizations  that   are
participants in such systems.
 
    Cede  & Co., as nominee for DTC, will  hold the global Notes. Cedel Bank and
Euroclear will hold omnibus positions on  behalf of the Cedel Bank  Participants
and  the  Euroclear  Participants, respectively,  through  customers' securities
accounts in Cedel Bank's and Euroclear's names on the books of their  respective
depositories  (collectively, the  "Depositories") which  in turn  will hold such
positions in customers' securities  accounts in the  Depositories' names on  the
books of DTC.
 
    DTC  is a limited-purpose trust company organized under the New York Banking
Law, a "banking organization" within the meaning of the New York Banking Law,  a
member  of  the  Federal Reserve  System,  a "clearing  corporation"  within the
meaning of the UCC in effect in the  State of New York, and a "clearing  agency"
registered  pursuant to the provisions  of Section 17A of  the Exchange Act. DTC
holds securities for its Participants  ("DTC Participants") and facilitates  the
clearance  and settlement among Participants of securities transactions, such as
transfers and  pledges, in  deposited securities  through electronic  book-entry
changes  in Participants'  accounts, thereby  eliminating the  need for physical
movement of  securities  Notes.  Participants  include  securities  brokers  and
dealers,  banks,  trust  companies,  clearing  corporations,  and  certain other
organizations. Indirect access  to the DTC  system is also  available to  others
such  as securities brokers  and dealers, banks, and  trust companies that clear
through or maintain a custodial relationship with a Participant, either directly
or indirectly ("Indirect  Participants"). The  rules applicable to  DTC and  its
Participants are on file with the Commission.
 
    Transfers  between DTC Participants will occur in accordance with DTC rules.
Transfers between Cedel Bank Participants and Euroclear Participants will  occur
in  the ordinary  way in  accordance with  their applicable  rules and operating
procedures.
 
    Cross-market  transfers  between  persons  holding  directly  or  indirectly
through  DTC in the United  States, on the one  hand, and directly or indirectly
through Cedel Bank Participants or Euroclear Participants on the other, will  be
effected  in DTC in accordance with DTC rules on behalf of the relevant European
international clearing  system by  its  Depository; however,  such  cross-market
transactions  will  require delivery  of instructions  to the  relevant European
international clearing system by the  counterparty in such system in  accordance
with  its rules  and procedures and  within its  established deadlines (European
time).  The  relevant  European  international  clearing  system  will,  if  the
transaction  meets  its  settlement requirements,  deliver  instructions  to its
Depository to take action to effect final settlement on its behalf by delivering
or receiving securities in  DTC, and making or  receiving payment in  accordance
with  normal procedures for  same-day funds settlement  applicable to DTC. Cedel
Bank Participants  and  Euroclear  Participants  may  not  deliver  instructions
directly to the Depositaries.
 
    Because  of time-zone  differences, credits of  securities in  Cedel Bank or
Euroclear as a  result of  a transaction  with a  DTC Participant  will be  made
during  the subsequent securities settlement  processing, dated the business day
following the DTC settlement date, and such credits or any transactions in  such
securities settled during such processing will be reported to the relevant Cedel
Bank Participant or Euroclear Participant on such business day. Cash received in
Cedel Bank or Euroclear as a result of sales of securities by or through a Cedel
Bank  Participant  or  a Euroclear  Participant  to  a DTC  Participant  will be
received with value  on the DTC  settlement date  but will be  available in  the
relevant  Cedel  Bank or  Euroclear cash  account  only as  of the  business day
following settlement in DTC.
 
    Purchases of  Notes  under  the  DTC  system must  be  made  by  or  through
Participants,  which will receive a  credit for the Notes  on DTC's records. The
ownership interest of each actual  Note Owner is in turn  to be recorded on  the
Participants'  and Indirect Participants' records.  Note Owners will not receive
written confirmation from DTC of their purchase, but Note Owners are expected to
receive written confirmations providing details  of the transaction, as well  as
periodic statements of their holdings, from
 
                                       47
<PAGE>
the  Participant or  Indirect Participant through  which the  Note Owner entered
into the transaction. Transfers  of ownership interests in  the Notes are to  be
accomplished  by entries made on  the books of Participants  acting on behalf of
Note Owners.  Note  Owners  will not  receive  certificates  representing  their
ownership  interest in  Notes, except  in the event  that use  of the book-entry
system for the Notes is discontinued.
 
    To facilitate subsequent transfers, all Notes deposited by Participants with
DTC are registered  in the name  of DTC's  partnership nominee, Cede  & Co.  The
deposit  of Notes  with DTC  and their registration  in the  name of  Cede & Co.
effects no change in  beneficial ownership. DTC has  no knowledge of the  actual
Owners of the Notes; DTC's records reflect only the identity of the Participants
to  whose accounts  such Notes are  credited, which may  or may not  be the Note
Owners. The Participants will  remain responsible for  keeping account of  their
holdings on behalf of their customers.
 
    Conveyance  of notices and  other communications by  DTC to Participants, by
Participants  to  Indirect  Participants,  and  by  Participants  and   Indirect
Participants to Note Owners will be governed by arrangements among them, subject
to  any statutory or  regulatory requirements as  may be in  effect from time to
time.
 
    Neither DTC nor Cede & Co. will consent or vote with respect to Notes. Under
its usual  procedures, DTC  mails an  omnibus proxy  to the  issuer as  soon  as
possible  after the record date, which assigns Cede & Co.'s consenting or voting
rights to those  Participants to whose  accounts the Notes  are credited on  the
record date (identified in a listing attached thereto).
 
    Principal  and interest  payments on  the Notes will  be made  to DTC. DTC's
practice is to credit Participants' accounts  on the Payment Date in  accordance
with  their respective holdings shown on DTC's  records unless DTC has reason to
believe that  it will  not receive  payment  on the  Payment Date.  Payments  by
Participants  to  Note  Owners will  be  governed by  standing  instructions and
customary practices, as  is the case  with securities held  for the accounts  of
customers  in  bearer form  or  registered in  "street  name," and  will  be the
responsibility of such Participant and not of DTC, the Indenture Trustee or  the
Depositor,  subject to  any statutory  or regulatory  requirements as  may be in
effect from  time to  time. Payment  of principal  and interest  to DTC  is  the
responsibility  of  the  Indenture  Trustee, disbursement  of  such  payments to
Participants shall  be  the responsibility  of  DTC, and  disbursement  of  such
payments  to the  Note Owners  shall be  the responsibility  of Participants and
Indirect Participants.
 
    DTC may discontinue  providing its  services as  securities depository  with
respect  to the Notes at  any time by giving  reasonable notice to the Indenture
Trustee. Under  such circumstances,  in the  event that  a successor  securities
depository  is not  obtained, Definitive  Notes are  required to  be printed and
delivered.
 
    The information in this section  concerning DTC and DTC's book-entry  system
has  been obtained from sources that the  Depositor believes to be reliable, but
the Depositor takes no responsibility for the accuracy thereof.
 
    Cedel Bank, societe anonyme ("Cedel Bank") is incorporated under the laws of
Luxembourg as a  professional depository.  Cedel Bank holds  securities for  its
Participants  ("Cedel  Bank  Participants") and  facilitates  the  clearance and
settlement of securities  transactions between Cedel  Bank Participants  through
electronic  book-entry changes in  accounts of Cedel  Bank Participants, thereby
eliminating the need for physical movement of Notes. Transactions may be settled
by Cedel Bank in  any of 28 currencies,  including United States dollars.  Cedel
Bank  provides to its Cedel Bank  Participants, among other things, services for
safekeeping, administration, clearance and settlement of internationally  traded
securities  and  securities lending  and borrowing.  Cedel Bank  interfaces with
domestic markets in several countries. As a professional depository, Cedel  Bank
is  subject  to regulations  by the  Luxembourg  Monetary Institute.  Cedel Bank
Participants are recognized financial  institutions around the world,  including
underwriters,  securities brokers and dealers,  banks, trust companies, clearing
corporations
 
                                       48
<PAGE>
and certain other organizations and may  include the underwriters of the  Notes.
Indirect  access  to Cedel  Bank is  also  available to  others, such  as banks,
brokers, dealers and trust companies that clear through or maintain a  custodial
relationship with a Cedel Bank Participant, either directly or indirectly.
 
    The  Euroclear System (the  "Euroclear System") was created  in 1968 to hold
securities for participants of  the Euroclear System ("Euroclear  Participants")
and  to  clear and  settle transactions  between Euroclear  Participants through
simultaneous electronic book-entry delivery against payment, thereby eliminating
the need  for  physical  movement  of  securities and  any  risk  from  lack  of
simultaneous  transfers of securities and cash.  Transactions may now be settled
in any of 32 currencies, including  United States dollars. The Euroclear  System
includes  various other services, including securities lending and borrowing and
interfaces with domestic markets in  several countries generally similar to  the
arrangements  for cross-market transfers with DTC described above. The Euroclear
System is  operated by  Morgan Guaranty  Trust Company  of New  York,  Brussels,
Belgium  office (the "Euroclear  Operator" or "Euroclear"),  under contract with
Euroclear  Clearance  System,  S.C.,  a  Belgian  cooperative  corporation  (the
"Cooperative").  All operations are conducted by the Euroclear Operator, and all
Euroclear securities clearance accounts and Euroclear cash accounts are accounts
with the Euroclear  Operator, not the  Cooperative. The Cooperative  establishes
policy  for the Euroclear system on  behalf of Euroclear Participants. Euroclear
Participants include  banks (including  central banks),  securities brokers  and
dealers  and  other professional  financial intermediaries  and may  include the
Underwriters of  the Notes.  Indirect access  to the  Euroclear System  is  also
available to other firms that clear through or maintain a custodial relationship
with  a Euroclear Participant, either directly or indirectly.              shall
be appointed transfer agent  in Luxembourg, with respect  to the Notes, in  case
the global Notes are replaced by Definitive Notes.
 
    The  Euroclear  Operator  is  the  Belgian  branch  of  a  New  York banking
corporation which is a member bank of the Federal Reserve System. As such, it is
regulated and examined by the Board  of Governors of the Federal Reserve  System
and  the  New York  State Banking  Department,  as well  as the  Belgian Banking
Commission.
 
    Securities clearance accounts and cash accounts with the Euroclear  Operator
are  governed by  the Terms  and Conditions Governing  Use of  Euroclear and the
related Operating Procedures of the Euroclear System and applicable Belgian  law
(collectively,  the  "Terms and  Conditions"). The  Terms and  Conditions govern
transfers of  securities and  cash within  the Euroclear  System, withdrawal  of
securities  and cash  from the Euroclear  System, and receipts  of payments with
respect to securities in the Euroclear  System. All securities in the  Euroclear
System  are held on a fungible  basis without attribution of specific securities
to specific securities clearance accounts. The Euroclear Operator acts under the
Terms and Conditions only on behalf of Euroclear Participants and has no  record
of or relationship with persons holding through Euroclear Participants.
 
    Distributions  with respect  to Notes held  through Cedel  Bank or Euroclear
will be credited to  the cash accounts of  Cedel Bank Participants or  Euroclear
Participants  in accordance with the relevant  system's rules and procedures, to
the extent received by its Depository. Such distributions will be subject to tax
reporting in accordance with  relevant United States  tax laws and  regulations.
Cedel  Bank or the Euroclear  Operator, as the case may  be, will take any other
action permitted to be taken by a Noteholder under the Indenture on behalf of  a
Cedel  Bank Participant or  a Euroclear Participant only  in accordance with its
relevant rules and procedures and subject to its Depository's ability to  effect
such actions on its behalf through DTC.
 
    Although  DTC,  Cedel  Bank  and  Euroclear  have  agreed  to  the foregoing
procedures in order to facilitate transfers of Notes among participants of  DTC,
Cedel Bank and Euroclear, they are under no obligation to perform or continue to
perform such procedures and such procedures may be discontinued at any time.
 
    A  paying agent shall  be maintained in  respect of the  Notes in Luxembourg
(the "Luxembourg Paying  Agent") for  so long  as the  Notes are  listed on  the
Luxembourg  Stock Exchange.                  has  been appointed  as the initial
Luxembourg Paying Agent.
 
                                       49
<PAGE>
DEFINITIVE NOTES
 
    The Notes of each Class will be issued in such registered, certificated form
to the Note Owners of such Class or their nominees ("Definitive Notes"),  rather
than  to the Depository or  its nominee, only if  (i) the Depository advises the
Indenture Trustee in writing that it is  no longer willing or able to  discharge
properly  its responsibilities as  Depository with respect to  the Notes of such
Class, and the Indenture Trustee is  unable to locate a qualified successor,  or
(ii) Note Owners representing not less than 50% of the Principal Balance of such
Class  advise the Indenture  Trustee and the  Depository through Participants in
writing that the continuation of a  book-entry system through the Depository  is
no longer in the best interest of the Note Owners of such Class.
 
    Upon  the  occurrence of  any  of the  events  described in  the immediately
preceding paragraph, the Depository  is required to  notify all Participants  of
the  availability through the Depository of  Definitive Notes. Upon surrender by
the Depository  of the  definitive  certificate representing  the Notes  of  the
affected  Class and  instructions for  registration, the  Indenture Trustee will
issue the Notes of such Class as Definitive Notes, and thereafter the  Indenture
Trustee will recognize the Holders of such Definitive Notes as Noteholders under
the Indenture.
 
    Distribution  of principal  and interest  on the Notes  will be  made by the
Indenture Trustee directly to Noteholders in accordance with the procedures  set
forth  herein and in the Indenture. Interest payments and any principal payments
on each Payment Date will be made  to Noteholders in whose names the  Definitive
Notes  were registered  at the  close of  business on  the related  Record Date.
Distributions will be made by check mailed to the address of such Noteholder  as
it  appears  on the  register  maintained by  the  Indenture Trustee.  The final
payment on any Note, however, will be made only upon presentation and  surrender
of  such  Note  at  the  office  or agency  specified  in  the  notice  of final
distribution to Noteholders. The Indenture  Trustee will provide such notice  to
registered  Noteholders mailed not later than the fifth day of the month of such
final distributions.
 
    Definitive Notes will be transferable and exchangeable at the offices of the
transfer agent  and registrar,  which initially  will be  the Trustee  (in  such
capacity,  the "Transfer Agent and Registrar") and the  offices of
which shall be  appointed as  transfer agent in  Luxembourg in  respect of  such
Definitive  Notes (the "Luxembourg  Transfer Agent"). No  service charge will be
imposed for any registration of transfer or exchange, but the Transfer Agent and
Registrar may require  payment of a  sum sufficient  to cover any  tax or  other
governmental  charge  imposed in  connection therewith.  The Transfer  Agent and
Registrar will  not  be  required  to  register  the  transfer  or  exchange  of
Definitive  Notes for the period from the Record Date preceding the due date for
any payment to the Payment Date with respect to such Definitive Notes.
 
MODIFICATION OF INDENTURE WITHOUT NOTEHOLDER CONSENT
 
    The Owner Trust  and the  Indenture Trustee (on  behalf of  the Trust)  may,
without  consent  of  the  Noteholders,  enter  into  one  or  more supplemental
indentures for any  of the  following purposes: (i)  to correct  or amplify  the
description  of the collateral or add additional collateral; (ii) to provide for
the assumption  of  the  Note  and the  Indenture  obligations  by  a  permitted
successor  to the Owner Trust; (iii) to add additional covenants for the benefit
of the Noteholders, or to surrender any rights or power conferred upon the Owner
Trust; (iv) to convey, transfer, assign,  mortgage or pledge any property to  or
with  the Indenture Trustee; (v) to cure  any ambiguity or correct or supplement
any provision in the Indenture or in any supplemental indenture; (vi) to provide
for the acceptance of the appointment of a successor Indenture Trustee or to add
to or change  any of  the provisions  of the  Indenture or  in any  supplemental
indenture which may be inconsistent with any other provision of the Indenture as
shall  be necessary and permitted to  facilitate the administration by more than
one trustee;  (vii)  to  modify, eliminate  or  add  to the  provisions  of  the
Indenture  in order to comply with the  Trust Indenture Act of 1939, as amended;
(viii) to avoid a reduction or withdrawal  of any rating of the Notes; and  (ix)
to  add  any  provisions to,  change  in any  manner,  or eliminate  any  of the
provisions of, the Indenture or modify in any
 
                                       50
<PAGE>
manner the rights of Noteholders under such Indenture; provided that any  action
specified  in this clause (ix) shall not  result in a reduction or withdrawal of
the rating of any Class of Notes, as confirmed in writing by each Rating Agency,
unless Noteholder consent is otherwise obtained as described below.
 
MODIFICATION OF INDENTURE WITH NOTEHOLDER CONSENT
 
    With the consent  of the Holders  representing a majority  of the  principal
balance  of each Class  of the Notes  then outstanding (a  "Note Majority"), the
Owner Trustee and the Indenture Trustee may execute a supplemental indenture  to
add  provisions to  change in  any manner  or eliminate  any provisions  of, the
Indenture, or modify in any manner the rights of the Noteholders.
 
    Without the consent of the Holder of each outstanding Note affected thereby,
however, no  supplemental  indenture  may:  (i)  change  the  due  date  of  any
installment  of principal  of or  interest on any  Note or  reduce the principal
amount thereof, the interest rate specified thereon or the redemption price with
respect thereto or  change the  manner of calculating  any such  payment or  any
place  of payment where the  coin or currency in which  any Note or any interest
thereon is payable; (ii) impair the right to institute suit for the  enforcement
of  certain  provisions of  the Indenture  regarding  payment; (iii)  reduce the
percentage of  each Class  of the  Notes  then outstanding  the consent  of  the
Holders  of which  is required  for any such  supplemental indenture  or for any
waiver of compliance  with certain  provisions of  the Indenture  or of  certain
defaults  thereunder and their consequences; (iv) modify or alter the provisions
of the Indenture  regarding the voting  of Notes  held by the  Owner Trust,  any
other  obligor on the Notes,  the Depositor or an affiliate  of any of them; (v)
reduce the  percentage of  the Notes  the consent  of the  Holders of  which  is
required  to  direct the  Indenture  Trustee to  sell  or liquidate  the Pledged
Revenues if the proceeds of such sale would be insufficient to pay the principal
amount and accrued but unpaid interest on the outstanding Notes; (vi) reduce the
percentage of each  Class of the  Notes then outstanding  required to amend  the
sections  of the Indenture which specify the applicable percentage of each Class
of the Notes then outstanding necessary to amend the Indenture or certain  other
related agreements; (vii) permit the creation of any lien ranking prior to or on
a  parity with the lien  of the Indenture with respect  to any of the collateral
for the  Notes  or,  except  as  otherwise  permitted  or  contemplated  in  the
Indenture, terminate the lien of the Indenture on any such collateral or deprive
the Holder of any Note of the security afforded by the lien of the Indenture; or
(viii) result in a reduction or withdrawal of the rating of any Class of Notes.
 
EVENTS OF DEFAULT; RIGHTS UPON EVENT OF DEFAULT
 
    "Events  of Default" under the Indenture will  consist of: (i) a default for
five days or more in  the payment of any interest  on any Note; (ii) failure  to
pay  the unpaid principal  amount of any  Class of Notes  on the Stated Maturity
Date for such Class;  (iii) a default  in the observance  or performance in  any
material  respect of any  covenant or agreement  of the Owner  Trust made in the
Indenture, or any  representation or  warranty made by  the Owner  Trust in  the
Indenture  or in  any certificate  delivered pursuant  thereto or  in connection
therewith having been incorrect as of the time made, and the continuation of any
such default or the failure to cure such breach of a representation or  warranty
for  a period of 30 days after notice thereof is given to the Owner Trust by the
Indenture Trustee or to the Owner Trust and the Indenture Trustee by the Holders
of at least  25% in  principal amount  of the  Notes then  outstanding; or  (iv)
certain  events of  bankruptcy, insolvency,  receivership or  liquidation of the
Owner Trust.
 
    If an Event of Default  should occur and be  continuing with respect to  the
Notes, the Indenture Trustee or a Note Majority may declare the principal of the
Notes  to be  immediately due and  payable. Such declaration  may, under certain
circumstances, be rescinded by a Note Majority.
 
    If the  Notes have  been declared  due  and payable  following an  Event  of
Default,  the Indenture Trustee may institute proceedings to collect amounts due
or foreclose on Pledged Revenues, exercise remedies as a secured party, sell the
related Pledged Revenues or elect to have the Owner Trust maintain possession of
the Pledged Revenues and continue to  apply collections on the Pledged  Revenues
as  if there  had been  no declaration  of acceleration.  The Indenture Trustee,
however, will be prohibited from selling the Pledged Revenues following an Event
of Default, unless (i) the Holders of all
 
                                       51
<PAGE>
the outstanding Notes consent to such sale;  (ii) the proceeds of such sale  are
sufficient  to pay in full the principal of  and the accrued interest on all the
outstanding Notes  at the  date of  such sale;  or (iii)  the Indenture  Trustee
determines  that the proceeds of the Pledged Revenues would not be sufficient on
an ongoing basis to make all payments  on the Notes as such payments would  have
become  due if such obligations  had not been declared  due and payable, and the
Indenture Trustee obtains the consent of the Holders of 66 2/3% of the aggregate
outstanding amount  of the  Notes.  Following a  declaration  upon an  Event  of
Default  that the Notes are immediately due and payable, (i) Class A Noteholders
will be entitled to payment of all outstanding principal and accrued but  unpaid
interest  from any proceeds of liquidation  of the Pledged Revenues, followed by
(ii) payment of interest and principal on  the Class B Notes, followed by  (iii)
payment of interest and principal on the Class C Notes, followed by (iv) payment
of interest and principal on the Equity Certificates.
 
    Subject  to the provisions  of the Indenture  relating to the  duties of the
Indenture Trustee,  if  an  Event  of Default  occurs  and  is  continuing,  the
Indenture  Trustee will be under no obligation  to exercise any of the rights or
powers under the Indenture at the request or direction of any of the Holders  of
the  Notes,  if  the  Indenture  Trustee  reasonably  believes  it  will  not be
adequately indemnified against the costs,  expenses and liabilities which  might
be  incurred by it in complying with such request. Subject to the provisions for
indemnification and  certain  limitations contained  in  the Indenture,  a  Note
Majority  will have the right to direct the time, method and place of conducting
any proceeding or  any remedy  available to the  Indenture Trustee,  and a  Note
Majority may, in certain cases, waive any default with respect thereto, except a
default  in the payment  of principal or interest  or a default  in respect of a
covenant or  provision of  the Indenture  that cannot  be modified  without  the
waiver or consent of all of the Holders of such outstanding Notes.
 
    No  Holder of a  Note will have  the right to  institute any proceeding with
respect to the  Indenture, unless (i)  such Holder previously  has given to  the
Indenture  Trustee written  notice of  a continuing  Event of  Default, (ii) the
Holders of not less than 25% in  principal amount of the outstanding Notes  have
made  written request of  the Indenture Trustee to  institute such proceeding in
its own name as Indenture Trustee, (iii) such Holder or Holders have offered the
Indenture Trustee reasonable indemnity,  (iv) the Indenture  Trustee has for  60
days failed to institute such proceeding, and (v) no direction inconsistent with
such  written request has been given to the Indenture Trustee during such 60-day
period by the  Holders of  a majority in  principal amount  of such  outstanding
Notes.
 
    If  an Event of Default occurs  and is continuing and if  it is known to the
Indenture Trustee, the Indenture Trustee will mail to each Noteholder notice  of
the  Event of Default  within 90 days after  it occurs. Except in  the case of a
failure to pay principal of or interest  on any Note, the Indenture Trustee  may
withhold  the  notice  if  and so  long  as  it determines  in  good  faith that
withholding the notice is in the interests of the Noteholders.
 
    In addition, the  Indenture Trustee  and the Noteholders,  by accepting  the
Notes,  will  covenant that  they will  not  at any  time institute  against the
Depositor or the Owner Trust any bankruptcy, reorganization or other  proceeding
under any federal or state bankruptcy or similar law.
 
    Neither  the  Indenture  Trustee nor  the  Owner Trustee  in  its individual
capacity, nor any Holder of a Note including, without limitation, the Depositor,
nor any of their respective owners, beneficiaries, agents, officers,  directors,
employees,  affiliates, successors or assigns will, in the absence of an express
agreement to the contrary, be personally liable for the payment of the Notes  or
for any agreement or covenant of the Owner Trust contained in the Indenture.
 
CERTAIN COVENANTS
 
    The  Indenture will provide that the Owner Trust may not consolidate with or
merge into any other entity, unless (i)  the entity formed by or surviving  such
consolidation  or merger is organized under the laws of the United States or any
state, (ii) such entity expressly assumes the Trust's obligation to make due and
punctual payments upon  the Notes  and the  performance or  observance of  every
agreement and covenant of the Owner Trust under the Indenture, (iii) no Event of
Default shall have occurred and be
 
                                       52
<PAGE>
continuing  immediately  after  such  merger or  consolidation,  (iv)  the Owner
Trustee has  been  advised  that  the  then current  rating  of  the  Notes  and
Certificates  (if any) then in  effect would not be  reduced or withdrawn by the
Rating Agencies  as a  result of  such merger  or consolidation,  (v) the  Owner
Trustee has received an opinion of counsel to the effect that such consolidation
or  merger would have no material adverse  tax consequence to the Owner Trust or
to any Noteholder or Certificateholder.
 
    The Owner  Trust will  not,  among other  things,  (i) except  as  expressly
permitted  by the Indenture or the  Trust Agreement, sell, transfer, exchange or
otherwise dispose of any of the assets of the Owner Trust, (ii) claim any credit
on or make any deduction from the  principal and interest payable in respect  of
the  related Notes  (other than  amounts withheld  under the  Code or applicable
state law) or  assert any claim  against any  present or former  Holder of  such
Notes  because of the payment of taxes  levied or assessed upon the Owner Trust,
(iii) dissolve or liquidate  in whole or  in part, (iv)  permit the validity  or
effectiveness  of  the Indenture  to  be impaired  or  permit any  person  to be
released from any covenants or obligations  with respect to the Notes under  the
Indenture  except  as  may be  expressly  permitted  thereby, or  (v)  except as
expressly permitted by the  Indenture, the Transfer  and Servicing Agreement  or
the  Trust Agreement, permit any lien, charge, excise, claim, security interest,
mortgage or other encumbrance to be created  on or extend to or otherwise  arise
upon  or  burden the  assets of  the Owner  Trust  or any  part thereof,  or any
interest therein or proceeds thereof.
 
    The Owner Trust may not engage in any activity other than as specified under
"The Depositor and the Owner Trust -- The Owner Trust." The Owner Trust will not
incur, assume or  guarantee any  indebtedness other  than indebtedness  incurred
pursuant  to the  Notes and  the Indenture or  otherwise in  accordance with the
Indenture, the Trust Agreement and the Transfer and Servicing Agreement.
 
ANNUAL COMPLIANCE STATEMENT
 
    The Owner Trust will be required to file annually with the Indenture Trustee
a written  statement  as  to  the  fulfillment  of  its  obligations  under  the
Indenture.
 
INDENTURE TRUSTEE'S ANNUAL REPORT
 
    The  Indenture Trustee will be required to mail each year to all Noteholders
a brief report  relating to  its eligibility  and qualification  to continue  as
Indenture  Trustee under the related Indenture, any amounts advanced by it under
the  Indenture,  the  amount,  interest  rate  and  maturity  date  of   certain
indebtedness owing by the Owner Trust to the Indenture Trustee in its individual
capacity,  the property  and funds physically  held by the  Indenture Trustee as
such and any action taken by it  that materially affects the Notes and that  has
not been previously reported.
 
SATISFACTION AND DISCHARGE OF INDENTURE
 
    The Indenture will be discharged with respect to the collateral securing the
Notes upon the delivery to the related Indenture Trustee for cancellation of all
such Notes or, with certain limitations, upon deposit with the Indenture Trustee
of funds sufficient for the payment in full of all of such Notes.
 
THE INDENTURE TRUSTEE
 
             will  be the Indenture Trustee. The Indenture Trustee may resign at
any time, in which event the Depositor will be obligated to appoint a  successor
trustee.  The Depositor may  also remove the Indenture  Trustee if the Indenture
Trustee ceases to be eligible to continue as such under the Indenture or if  the
Indenture  Trustee becomes insolvent. In  such circumstances, the Depositor will
be obligated to appoint a successor  trustee. Any resignation or removal of  the
Indenture  Trustee  and  appointment  of a  successor  trustee  will  not become
effective until acceptance of the appointment by a successor trustee.
 
                                       53
<PAGE>
              DESCRIPTION OF THE TRANSFER AND SERVICING AGREEMENT
 
TRANSFER AND ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACTS AND EQUIPMENT
 
    On  the  Merger  Consummation Date,  the  Originators will  transfer  to the
Depositor pursuant  to the  Transfer Agreement  all of  their right,  title  and
interest in the Contracts, including all security interests created thereby, the
right  to  receive  all  Scheduled  Payments  and  Prepayments  received  on the
Contracts on or  after the Cut-Off  Date (including all  Scheduled Payments  due
prior  to, but not received as of, the Cut-Off Date, but excluding any Scheduled
Payments due on or after, but received  prior to, the Cut-Off Date), all  rights
under  insurance policies maintained on the Equipment pursuant to the Contracts,
all documents contained in the Contract Files and all proceeds derived from  any
of  the  foregoing. Pursuant  to the  Transfer and  Servicing Agreement,  on the
Merger Consummation  Date, the  Depositor will  transfer all  of the  foregoing,
together with all its rights under the Transfer Agreement, to the Owner Trust.
 
    The  Transfer  and  Servicing  Agreement  will  designate  the  Servicer  as
custodian to  maintain possession,  as  the Indenture  Trustee's agent,  of  the
Contracts  and all documents  related thereto. To  facilitate servicing and save
administrative costs, the documents will not be physically segregated from other
similar documents that are in TCC's possession. UCC financing statements will be
filed on the Merger Consummation Date in the applicable jurisdictions reflecting
the assignment of  the Contracts by  the Originators to  the Depositor, and  the
transfer  by the Depositor  to the Owner Trust,  and the Originators' accounting
records and computer systems will  also reflect such assignments. The  Contracts
will  not, however, be  stamped or otherwise physically  marked to reflect their
assignment to the  Owner Trust. If,  through fraud, negligence  or otherwise,  a
subsequent  purchaser were  able to  take physical  possession of  the Contracts
without knowledge of the assignment, the Trust's interest in the Contracts could
be defeated. See "Risk Factors -- Certain Legal Aspects."
 
COLLECTIONS ON CONTRACTS
 
    The Servicer will  deposit in the  Collection Account on  a daily basis,  no
later  than the fifth Business Day after receipt thereof, the following payments
or collections received by it after the Cut-Off Date:
 
       (i) all Scheduled Payments  made by on  or behalf of  Obligors under  the
           Contracts;
 
       (ii)all  amounts paid by an Obligor  in connection with the prepayment or
           early termination of a Contract in respect of the Contract  Principal
    Balance  plus  the current  Scheduled Payment  and any  delinquent Scheduled
    Payments;
 
       (iii)
           all amounts (a)  recovered from  an Obligor (other  than through  the
           sale  or other disposition  of the related  Equipment) from and after
    the date of termination of such Contract  by the Servicer, on behalf of  the
    Owner  Trust, as  a result of  a default  by the Obligor  thereunder, or (b)
    realized  from  the  sale  or  other  disposition  of  the  Equipment  which
    constituted  security  for  any Loan  Contract  following a  default  by the
    Obligor under such Loan Contract, and  that portion of any amounts  realized
    from  the sale or  other disposition of  the Equipment related  to any Lease
    Contract following a default  by the Obligor under  such Lease Contract  and
    allocable   to  the  Notes  and   Equity  Certificates  as  described  under
    "Description of the Notes -- Contract Defaults";
 
       (iv)any and  all  payments made  by  TCC  pursuant to  the  Transfer  and
           Servicing  Agreement in connection with  the purchase of any Contract
    as a result of a breach of a representation or warranty made therein; and
 
       (v) any amounts received  as insurance  proceeds in  connection with  the
           destruction  of Equipment related to any Loan Contract, to the extent
    not applied to the replacement of such Equipment as described below.
 
    The Servicer will be  entitled to withdraw from  the Collection Account  any
amounts deposited therein in error or required to be repaid to an Obligor, based
on  the Servicer's  good-faith determination that  such amount  was deposited in
error or must be returned to the Obligor.
 
                                       54
<PAGE>
    Under the  Transfer and  Servicing Agreement,  the Servicer  is required  to
establish  in its own name one or  more "Insurance and Tax Accounts," into which
are to  be  deposited any  payments  made by  or  on behalf  of  Obligors  which
constitute  (a) insurance premiums paid  by an Obligor to  the lessor or secured
party under a Contract (unless such payments are made directly by the Obligor to
the applicable insurance company), (b) any insurance payments or recoveries paid
by an insurance company or comparable third party and related to the damage  to,
or  destruction of, the Equipment related to such Contract (unless paid directly
by such insurance company  or comparable third party  directly to the  Obligor),
and  (c) taxes  paid by Obligor  and related  to the applicable  Contract or the
Equipment related thereto (unless such payment  is made directly by the  Obligor
to  the applicable taxing authority or authorities). The Servicer is required to
withdraw amounts from the Insurance and  Tax Accounts, when and if  appropriate,
to  pay when due (1) all insurance premiums in the amounts received under clause
(a) above, and (2)  all taxes in  the amounts received  under clause (c)  above.
Amounts  on deposit  in the Insurance  and Tax Accounts  which represent amounts
received by the Servicer pursuant  to clause (b) above  shall be applied by  the
Servicer as follows: if the Obligor purchases equipment to replace the Equipment
that  was  damaged  or destroyed,  and  such  replacement equipment  is  (in the
reasonable opinion of the  Servicer) of comparable use  and equivalent value  to
the  Equipment that  was damaged or  destroyed, the Servicer  shall release such
amount so received from the insurance company or comparable third party to or at
the instructions of the  Obligor; and if  this replacement option  is not to  be
exercised by the Obligor, then the Servicer shall (a) if the applicable Contract
was  a Loan Contract, transfer such amount from the Insurance and Tax Account to
the Collection Account, and (b) if the applicable Contract was a Lease Contract,
transfer that portion of such amount which  would be allocable to the Notes  and
the  Equity Certificates in respect of the  liquidation of the Equipment under a
defaulted Lease Contract (as referred to in clause (iii) of the first  paragraph
of this section) from the Insurance and Tax Account to the Collection Account.
 
    The Servicer will deposit in the Residual Payment Account, no later than the
fifth business day after receipt, all proceeds from the disposition of Equipment
allocable  to  the Equipment  Certificate, include  amounts  paid by  Lessees to
exercise purchase  options  under  True  Leases and  the  allocable  portion  of
proceeds realized following a default under a True Lease.
 
    On  or before the    Business  Day of each month (the "Determination Date"),
the Servicer is required to determine the amount of Pledged Revenues on  deposit
in the Collection Account as of the last Business Day preceding the Payment Date
ocurring  in such month  and received by  or on behalf  of the Indenture Trustee
during the prior Collection Period, the amount of interest payable on the  Notes
and  the Equity Certificates on such  Payment Date, the Monthly Principal Amount
for such Payment Date, the Principal Deficiency Amount (if any) for such Payment
Date, and the amount, if  any, by which such  Pledged Revenues, when applied  in
accordance  with the  priorities described  under "Description  of the  Notes --
Distributions," are insufficient to  pay the interest payable  on the Notes  and
the  Equity Certificates on such Payment  Date (an "Interest Shortfall"). If the
Servicer determines that there is an  Interest Shortfall for such Payment  Date,
the  Servicer shall instruct the Indenture Trustee to determine the total amount
of Pledged Revenues on deposit in the Collection Account as of the Business  Day
preceding  such Payment Date which were received  by or on behalf of the Trustee
after the preceding Collection Period, and to apply such Pledged Revenues to the
payment of  interest on  the Notes  and the  Equity Certificates  to the  extent
necessary  to cure such Interest Shortfall.  The Servicer shall further instruct
the Indenture  Trustee to  withdraw from  the Cash  Collateral Account  (1)  any
remaining Interest Shortfall (after giving effect to the previous application of
Pledged  Revenues as aforesaid),  (2) the Principal  Deficiency Amount (if any),
and (3) if such Payment Date is the Stated Maturity Date for any Class of  Notes
or the Equity Certificates, the remaining unpaid principal balance of such Class
of Notes or the Equity Certificates (after giving effect to previous application
of Pledged Revenues as aforesaid).
 
SERVICING
 
    Pursuant to the Transfer and Servicing Agreement, TCC will be engaged to act
as  Servicer on behalf of  the Owner Trust. The  Servicer is generally obligated
under the Transfer and Servicing Agreement to take such actions with respect  to
enforcement   of  the   Contracts  as   a  reasonably   prudent  creditor  would
 
                                       55
<PAGE>
take. The Servicer  is further obligated  to service the  Contracts in a  manner
consistent  with its  servicing of  other similar  receivables which  it owns or
services for third parties. The Servicer  may delegate certain of its  servicing
responsibilities  with respect to the Contracts  to third parties, provided that
the Servicer will remain obligated to the Owner Trust for the proper performance
of all such servicing responsibilities.
 
    The Servicer  is generally  obligated to  act in  a commercially  reasonable
manner  with  respect  to  the disposition  of  Equipment  following  a Contract
default, and to attempt to  realize at least the  Book Value of such  Equipment.
The  Servicer is  permitted, in  its discretion,  to dispose  of Equipment  in a
manner that may not be commercially  reasonable and realizes less than the  fair
market  value or the Book Value of  such Equipment (whichever is less), provided
that the Servicer remits any such deficiency to the Collection Account.
 
    Under the Transfer and Servicing Agreement, the Servicer is responsible for,
among other  things:  reviewing  and  certifying that  the  Contract  Files  are
complete;  monitoring and tracking  any property and  sales taxes to  be paid by
Obligors;  billing,  collection  and   recording  of  payments  from   Obligors;
communicating  with and providing billing records  to Obligors; deposit of funds
into the Collection  Account; receiving  payments as  the Trust's  agent on  the
insurance  policies maintained by  the Obligors and  communicating with insurers
with respect thereto; issuance of reports to the Indenture Trustee specified  in
the  Indenture and in the Transfer and Servicing Agreement; and repossession and
remarketing of Equipment following Obligor defaults.
 
    PREPAYMENTS.  In the case  of any Lease Contract,  a Prepayment may only  be
allowed  by the Servicer if the amount paid by  or on behalf of the Lessee is at
least  equal  to  the  Contract  Principal  Balance  of  such  Contract   (after
application  of the current month's Scheduled Payment), plus the current month's
Scheduled Payment and any delinquent payments.
 
    EVIDENCE AS TO COMPLIANCE.  On or before March 31 of each year, the Servicer
must deliver  to the  Indenture  Trustee a  report  of a  nationally  recognized
accounting  firm  stating  that such  firm  has examined  certain  documents and
records relating to the servicing of  equipment leases serviced by the  Servicer
and  stating that,  on the  basis of  such procedures,  such servicing  has been
conducted in compliance with  the Transfer and  Servicing Agreement, except  for
any exceptions set forth in such report.
 
    CERTAIN  MATTERS REGARDING THE  SERVICER.  The Servicer  may not resign from
its obligations  under  the  Transfer  and Servicing  Agreement  except  upon  a
determination  that  its  duties  thereunder  are  no  longer  permissible under
applicable law.  No such  resignation will  become effective  until a  successor
servicer  has assumed the  Servicer's obligations and  duties under the Transfer
and Servicing Agreement. The Servicer can  be removed as Servicer only upon  the
occurrence of an Event of Termination as discussed below.
 
    The  Servicer must  keep in  place throughout the  term of  the Transfer and
Servicing Agreement (i) a  policy or policies of  insurance covering errors  and
omissions by the Servicer, and (ii) a fidelity bond. Such policy or policies and
such  fidelity bond shall be  in such form and  amount as is generally customary
among persons that  service a  portfolio of  equipment leases  having an  unpaid
balance  of at least $100 million and  which are generally regarded as servicers
acceptable to institutional investors.
 
    SERVICING COMPENSATION  AND  PAYMENT  OF  EXPENSES.    Compensation  to  the
Servicer will include a monthly fee (the "Servicing Fee"), which will be payable
to  the Servicer from  the Amount Available  on each Payment  Date, in an amount
equal to the product of one-twelfth of   % per annum multiplied by the  Contract
Pool  Principal Balance  as of  the last  day of  the second  preceding calendar
month, plus any  late fees  and other administrative  fees and  the expenses  or
similar  charges  collected  with  respect to  the  Contracts  during  the prior
Collection Period.
 
    EVENTS OF  TERMINATION.   An Event  of Termination  under the  Transfer  and
Servicing  Agreement will occur if (a) the Servicer fails to make any payment or
deposit required under  the Transfer  and Servicing Agreement  and such  failure
continues  for four business days; (b) the  Servicer fails to perform or observe
in any material  respect any  other covenant or  agreement in  the Transfer  and
Servicing  Agreement that continues unremedied for thirty days; (c) the Servicer
conveys, assigns, delegates its duties or rights
 
                                       56
<PAGE>
under the Transfer  and Servicing  Agreement, except  as specifically  permitted
under  the  Transfer  and  Servicing  Agreement,  or  attempts  to  make  such a
conveyance, delegation or  assignment; (d)  a court having  jurisdiction in  the
premises  enters a decree or  order for relief in respect  of the Servicer in an
involuntary case under  any applicable bankruptcy,  insolvency or other  similar
law  now or hereafter  in effect, or appoints  a receiver, liquidator, assignee,
custodian, trustee, or sequestrator  (or similar official)  of the Servicer,  as
the  case may be, or enters a decree or order for any substantial liquidation of
its affairs; or (e) the Servicer commences a voluntary case under any applicable
bankruptcy, insolvency or  other similar  law, or consents  to the  entry of  an
order  for relief in an involuntary case under  any such law, or consents to the
appointment of  or  taking  possession  by  a  receiver,  liquidator,  assignee,
custodian  or its creditors, or fails to, or admits in writing its inability to,
pay its debts as they become due,  or takes any corporate action in  furtherance
of  the foregoing.  The Servicer  is required  under the  Transfer and Servicing
Agreement to give the Indenture Trustee  and the Noteholders notice of an  Event
of Termination promptly upon the occurrence of such event.
 
    Federal  bankruptcy laws limit the termination of contracts solely by reason
of the fact that the party obligated  to provide such performance is subject  to
federal  bankruptcy proceedings. In such  a circumstance, the bankruptcy trustee
of the  Servicer  might  successfully object  to  the  exercise of  a  right  to
terminate  the  Servicer unless  the  Indenture Trustee  could  demonstrate that
independent grounds (whether  or not  arising from  the same  facts causing  the
Servicer  to be subject to bankruptcy proceedings)  exist to declare an Event of
Termination.
 
    RIGHTS UPON  EVENT OF  TERMINATION.   So  long as  an Event  of  Termination
remains  unremedied, the Indenture Trustee may,  and at the written direction of
Noteholders representing more than 25% of the aggregate Principal Balance of the
Notes must, terminate all  of the rights and  obligations of the Servicer  under
the  Transfer  and Servicing  Agreement  in and  to  the Contracts,  whereupon a
successor  servicer  will  succeed  to  all  the  responsibilities,  duties  and
liabilities  of the Servicer under the Transfer and Servicing Agreement and will
be entitled to  similar compensation arrangements;  provided, however, that  any
successor servicer will not assume any obligation of TCC to repurchase Contracts
for  breaches of representations and warranties, and any successor servicer will
not be liable for any acts or omissions of the prior Servicer occurring prior to
a transfer of the Servicer's servicing  and related functions or for any  breach
by  such  Servicer of  any  of its  obligations  contained in  the  Transfer and
Servicing Agreement.
 
AMENDMENT
 
    The Transfer and Servicing Agreement may  be amended by the parties  thereto
(i)  to cure any ambiguity, (ii) to  correct or supplement any provision therein
that may be inconsistent with any other provision therein, or (iii) to make  any
other provisions with respect to matters or questions arising under the Transfer
and  Servicing Agreement that are not  inconsistent with the provisions thereof,
provided that such action will not adversely affect in any material respect  the
interests  of the Noteholders. The Transfer  and Servicing Agreement may also be
amended by the  parties thereto  with the  consent of  a Note  Majority and  the
holders  of at least 51% in the aggregate of the outstanding principal amount of
the Equity Certificates for the purpose of adding any provisions to or  changing
in any manner or eliminating any of the provisions of the Transfer and Servicing
Agreement  or of modifying  in any manner  the rights of  the Noteholders or the
holders of the Equity  Certificates; provided, however,  that no such  amendment
that  reduces in any manner the amount of,  or delays the timing of, any payment
received on or with respect to Contracts that are required to be distributed  on
any Note may be effective with the consent of the Holder of each such Note.
 
TERMINATION OF THE AGREEMENT
 
    The  obligations  created  by  the  Transfer  and  Servicing  Agreement will
terminate (after  distribution  of  all  interest  and  principal  then  due  to
Noteholders  and the  holders of  the Certificates)  on the  earlier of  (i) the
Payment Date next succeeding the later of the final payment or other liquidation
of the  last  Contract  or  the  disposition  of  all  Equipment  acquired  upon
termination of any Contract; or (b) the
 
                                       57
<PAGE>
Payment Date on which the Depositor repurchases the Contracts as described under
"Description of the Notes -- Repurchase Option." However, TCC's representations,
warranties  and indemnities  will survive  any termination  of the  Transfer and
Servicing Agreement.
 
THE OWNER TRUSTEE
 
          will act as Owner Trustee under the Trust Agreement. The Owner Trustee
may resign  at any  time, in  which event  the Depositor  will be  obligated  to
appoint  a  successor Owner  Trustee. The  Depositor may  also remove  the Owner
Trustee if the Owner Trustee ceases to be eligible to continue as such under the
Trust Agreement or if  the Owner Trustee becomes  insolvent. Any resignation  or
removal  of the Owner Trustee and appointment  of a successor Owner Trustee will
not become effective until  acceptance of the appointment  of a successor  Owner
Trustee.
 
                     CERTAIN LEGAL ASPECTS OF THE CONTRACTS
 
ENFORCEMENT OF SECURITY INTERESTS IN THE EQUIPMENT
 
    Due  to the  administrative burden  and expense,  no assignments  of the UCC
financing statements evidencing the security interest of the Originators in  the
Equipment  (to the extent that such financing statements have been filed against
the Obligor, as discussed above) will be  filed to reflect the Seller's and  the
Trust's  interests  therein. While  failure to  file  such assignments  does not
affect  the  perfection  of  the  Trust's  interest  in  such  Financing  Leases
(including the related Originator's security interest in the related Equipment),
it does expose the Owner Trust to the risk that the Originator could release its
security  interest  in the  Equipment  of record,  and  it could  complicate the
Trust's enforcement, as  assignee, of  the Originator security  interest in  the
Equipment.  In addition, also  due to the administrative  burden and expense, no
UCC financing statement reflecting the security  interest of the Owner Trust  in
the related Equipment will be filed in the jurisdictions (other than New Jersey)
where  the Equipment is located. In the absence of such filings, the Owner Trust
may not have a  perfected security interest  in such Equipment.  As a result,  a
third  party  purchaser  of the  Equipment  for  value from  the  Originator may
purchase such Equipment free  and clear of  the interest of  the Owner Trust  in
such  Equipment and a subsequent secured party or other lienholder may obtain an
interest in  the Equipment  superior to  that of  the Owner  Trust. These  risks
should  not affect the perfection or priority of the interest of the Owner Trust
in the Contracts or rights to payment thereunder. Additionally, statutory  liens
for repairs or unpaid taxes and other liens arising by operation of law may have
priority  even over prior perfected security interests  in the name of the Owner
Trust in the Equipment.
 
    In the event of a default by  the Obligor under a Contract, the Servicer  on
behalf  of  the applicable  Trust may  take action  to enforce  the Originator's
interest in the related Equipment by repossession and resale or re-lease of  the
Equipment. Under the UCC in most states, a creditor can, without prior notice to
the  debtor, repossess  assets securing  a defaulted  contract by  the Obligor's
voluntary surrender,  or by  "self-help" repossession  that does  not involve  a
breach  of the  peace and  by judicial  process. In  the event  of bankruptcy or
insolvency of  the  Obligor these  remedies  may  require the  permission  of  a
bankruptcy court or may otherwise not be immediately available.
 
    In  the event of a  default by the Obligor,  some jurisdictions require that
the Obligor be notified of the default  and be given a time period within  which
it  may  cure  the  default  prior to  repossession.  Generally,  this  right of
reinstatement may be exercised on a limited number of occasions in any  one-year
period.
 
    The  UCC  and other  state laws  place  restrictions on  repossession sales,
including requirements that the secured party provide the debtor with reasonable
notice of the  date, time and  place of any  public sale and/or  the date  after
which  any private sale of the collateral may  be held and that any such sale be
conducted in a commercially reasonable manner.
 
    Under most state laws, an Obligor has the right to redeem collateral for its
obligations prior to actual sale by paying the lessor the unpaid balance of  the
obligation  plus reasonable expenses for repossessing, holding and preparing the
collateral for  disposition and  arranging for  its sale,  plus, to  the  extent
provided  for in  the written  agreement of  the parties,  reasonable attorneys'
fees.
 
                                       58
<PAGE>
    In addition, because the  market value of equipment  of the type subject  to
the  Contracts generally  declines with  age, because  of obsolescence,  the net
disposition proceeds of Equipment at any  time during the term of the  Contracts
may  not equal or exceed the Contract Principal Balance on the related Contract.
Because of this, and because other creditors may in certain cases have rights in
the related Equipment superior to those of the Owner Trust, the Servicer may not
be able to recover the  entire amount due on a  defaulted Contract in the  event
that the Servicer elects to repossess and dispose such Equipment at any time.
 
    Under  the UCC and laws applicable in most states, a creditor is entitled to
obtain a deficiency judgment from an Obligor for any deficiency on  repossession
and  resale of the asset securing the unpaid balance of such obligor's contract.
However, some states impose prohibitions or limitations on deficiency judgments.
In most jurisdictions, the courts, in interpreting the UCC, would impose upon  a
creditor  an obligation to repossess the  equipment in a commercially reasonable
manner and to "mitigate damages" in the event of an Obligor's failure to cure  a
default.  The creditor  would be  required to  exercise reasonable  judgment and
follow acceptable  commercial practice  in seizing,  selling or  re-leasing  the
equipment  and to offset the net proceeds of such disposition against its claim.
In addition, an obligor may successfully invoke an election of remedies  defense
to  a deficiency claim in the event that the Servicer's repossession and sale of
the Equipment  is found  to be  a  retention discharging  the obligor  from  all
further  obligations under the  UCC. If a deficiency  judgment were granted, the
judgment would be a personal judgment against the Obligor for the shortfall, but
a defaulting Obligor  may have  limited assets  or sources  of income  available
following repossession. Therefore, in many cases, it may not be useful to seek a
deficiency  judgment or, if one is obtained,  it may be settled at a significant
discount.
 
    Many states have adopted a version of Article 2A of the UCC ("Article  2A").
Article  2A purports to codify many  provisions of existing common law. Although
there  is  little  precedental  authority  regarding  how  Article  2A  will  be
interpreted,   it  may,  among   other  things,  limit   enforceability  of  any
"unconscionable" provision in a lease, provide a Obligor with remedies including
the right to cancel the lease contract for any lessor breach or default, and may
add to or modify the terms of "consumer leases" and leases where the Lessee is a
"merchant Lessee." However, each Lease  Contract contains an acknowledgement  by
the  Lessee that the  Equipment was acquired for  business purposes. Article 2A,
moreover, recognizes  typical  commercial  lease "hell  or  high  water"  rental
payment  clauses and validates  reasonable liquidated damages  provisions in the
event of lessor or  Lessee defaults. Article 2A  also recognizes the concept  of
freedom  of contract  and permits  the parties  in a  commercial context  a wide
latitude to vary provisions of the law.
 
INSOLVENCY MATTERS
 
    Certain statutory  provisions, including  federal and  state bankruptcy  and
insolvency  laws, may also  limit the ability  of the Servicer  to repossess and
resell or re-lease collateral or obtain  a deficiency judgment. In the event  of
the  bankruptcy  or  reorganization  of  a  Lessee  or  the  Depositor,  various
provisions of the Bankruptcy  Code of 1978 (the  "Bankruptcy Code") and  related
laws  may interfere with or eliminate the ability of the Trustee or the Servicer
on its behalf to  enforce the Trust's rights  under the Contracts. For  example,
although  the bankruptcy or reorganization of a Lessee would constitute an event
of default under  such Contracts,  the Bankruptcy Code  provides generally  that
rights and obligations under an unexpired lease or an executory contract may not
be  terminated  or  modified solely  because  of  a provision  in  the  lease or
executory contract  conditioned  upon  the  commencement of  a  case  under  the
Bankruptcy  Code. If  bankruptcy proceedings  were instituted  in respect  of an
Obligor under a Contract, the Owner Trust could be prevented from continuing  to
collect payments due from or on behalf of such Lessee or exercising any remedies
assigned  to the Owner Trust  without the approval of  the bankruptcy court, and
the bankruptcy court could permit the Lessee, as owner of the Equipment, to  use
or  dispose  of  the  Equipment and  provide  the  Owner Trust  with  a  lien on
substitute collateral, so long as the court held that such substitute collateral
constituted "adequate protection" within the meaning of the Bankruptcy Code.  In
addition,  in  the  event of  an  insolvency  of an  originator  other  than the
Originator,
 
                                       59
<PAGE>
a court  could attempt  to recharacterize  the  sale of  the Contracts  by  such
third-party  originator to  the Originator as  a borrowing  from the Originator,
secured by a pledge of such Contracts and the rights in the Equipment.
 
    In the  case of  a Lease  Contract that  is not  intended as  security,  the
Bankruptcy  Code grants to the bankruptcy  trustee or the debtor-in-possession a
right to elect to  assume or reject any  executory contract or unexpired  lease.
Any  rejection of such a lease or contract constitutes a breach of such lease or
contract, entitling the non-breaching party to  a claim for breach of  contract.
The  net proceeds from any resulting judgment would be deposited by the Servicer
into the  Collection Account  and allocated  to the  Noteholders as  more  fully
described  herein. Upon the bankruptcy of a Lessee, if the bankruptcy trustee or
debtor-in-possession elected to reject a  Lease Contract, the flow of  scheduled
payments  to  Noteholders would  cease. Similarly,  upon  the bankruptcy  of the
Depositor, if the bankruptcy trustee or debtor-in-possession elected to reject a
Lease Contract,  the  flow  of  Contract  payments  to  the  Depositor  and  the
Noteholders  would  cease.  As  noted above,  however,  the  Depositor  has been
structured so that the  filing of a  bankruptcy petition with  respect to it  is
unlikely. See "The Depositor and the Owner Trust -- The Depositor."
 
    In  the event that,  as a result  of the bankruptcy  or reorganization of an
Obligor, the related Contract becomes a defaulted Contract, the amount available
to be withdrawn from, or drawn on, the Cash Collateral Account has been  reduced
to  zero and the Contract has become  a defaulted Contract without breach of any
representation or  warranty  of TCC  or  the  Depositor, no  recourse  would  be
available  against TCC or the Depositor and  the Noteholders could suffer a loss
with respect to such Contract.
 
    These UCC and bankruptcy provisions, in addition to the possible decrease in
the value of a repossessed item of  Equipment, may limit the amount realized  on
the  sale  of collateral  securing the  Contracts  to less  than the  amount due
thereunder.
 
                                       60
<PAGE>
                             UNITED STATES TAXATION
 
    The following  discussion is  a  summary of  certain United  States  federal
income tax considerations relevant to the purchase, ownership and disposition of
the  Notes  by  the  holders  thereof. Dorsey  &  Whitney  LLP,  counsel  to the
Depositor, and  Cadwalader,  Wickersham  & Taft,  counsel  to  the  Underwriters
(collectively,  "Counsel"), are each delivering  their opinion regarding certain
federal income tax matters discussed below. The opinions of Counsel specifically
address only those issues specifically identified below as being covered by such
opinions; however,  the  opinions of  Counsel  also state  that  the  additional
discussion  set forth below accurately sets  forth Counsel's advice with respect
to material tax issues. The opinions of Counsel are not binding on the  Internal
Revenue  Service (the "IRS"). There can be no assurance that the IRS will take a
similar view of such issues, and no assurance can be given that the opinions  of
Counsel  would be sustained  if challenged by the  IRS. No ruling  on any of the
issues discussed below will be sought from the IRS.
 
    This summary does not purport to be a complete analysis of all the potential
federal  income  tax  consequences  relating  to  the  purchase,  ownership  and
disposition  of the Notes. Moreover, the discussion does not address all aspects
of taxation that  may be  relevant to particular  purchasers in  light of  their
individual  circumstances (including the  effect of any  foreign, state or local
tax laws) or to  certain types of purchasers  (including dealers in  securities,
insurance  companies, financial institutions and tax-exempt entities) subject to
special treatment under United  States federal income  tax laws. The  discussion
below assumes that the Notes are held as capital assets.
 
    The  discussion of  the United  States federal  income tax  consequences set
forth below is based upon currently existing provisions of the Internal  Revenue
Code  of 1986, as  amended (the "Code"),  judicial decisions, and administrative
interpretations. Because individual circumstances  may differ, each  prospective
purchaser  of the Notes  is strongly urged  to consult its  own tax advisor with
respect to its particular tax situation and the tax effects of any state, local,
foreign, or other tax laws and possible changes in the tax laws.
 
    As used herein, the term "United States Holder" means a beneficial owner  of
a  Note who or which is for United States federal income tax purposes either (i)
a citizen or resident of the  United States, (ii) a corporation, partnership  or
other  entity created or organized in or under  the laws of the United States or
of any political subdivision thereof, or (iii) an estate or trust the income  of
which  is subject  to United  States federal  income taxation  regardless of its
source. The term  also includes  certain former  citizens of  the United  States
whose income and gain on the Notes will be subject to United States taxation. As
used herein, the term "United States Alien Holder" means a beneficial owner of a
Note that is not a United States Holder.
 
TREATMENT OF THE NOTES
 
    In  the opinion of  Counsel, the Notes  will be treated  as indebtedness for
United States federal income tax purposes. Under the terms of the Notes and  the
Indenture,  each Noteholder  agrees and  acknowledges upon  its purchase  of the
Notes and  by acceptance  of the  Notes that  it will  also treat  the Notes  as
indebtedness for such purposes.
 
TREATMENT OF THE OWNER TRUST
 
    In  the opinion of Counsel, the Owner  Trust will not be characterized as an
"association" or "publicly traded partnership" taxable as a corporation. If  the
Owner  Trust  were  treated  as  either  an  association  or  a  publicly traded
partnership taxable as a corporation, the  resulting entity would be subject  to
federal  income taxes at corporate tax rates  on its taxable income generated by
ownership of the Contracts, and certain distributions by the entity would not be
deductible in computing the  entity's taxable income.  Such an entity-level  tax
could result in reduced distributions to Noteholders.
 
PAYMENTS OF INTEREST
 
    Interest  paid on a Note will generally be taxable to a United States Holder
as ordinary interest income at the time it accrues or is received in  accordance
with  the United  States Holder's  method of  accounting for  federal income tax
purposes.
 
                                       61
<PAGE>
ORIGINAL ISSUE DISCOUNT
 
    Under applicable regulations, a Note will be considered issued with original
issue discount ("OID") if the "stated redemption price at maturity" of the  Note
(generally  equal to its  principal amount as  of the date  of issuance plus all
interest other than "qualified stated interest" payable prior to or at maturity)
exceeds the original issue  price (in this case,  the initial offering price  at
which  a substantial amount of the Notes are  sold to the public). Any OID would
be considered DE MINIMIS under the regulations if it does not exceed .25% of the
stated redemption price at maturity of a  Note multiplied by the number of  full
years  until its  maturity date. It  is anticipated  that the Notes  will not be
considered issued with more  than DE MINIMIS OID.  Under the OID regulations,  a
holder of a Note issued with a DE MINIMIS amount of OID must include such OID in
income, on a pro rata basis, as principal payments are made on the Note.
 
    While  it is not anticipated that the Notes will be issued with more than DE
MINIMIS OID, it is possible that they will be so issued. If the Notes are issued
with more than DE  MINIMIS OID, such  OID would be includible  in the income  of
Noteholders  as  interest over  the term  of  the Notes  under a  constant yield
method. Any amount included in income  as OID would not, however, be  includible
again  when the amount is actually received. If the yield on a class of Notes is
not  materially  different  from  its  coupon,  this  treatment  will  have   no
significant  effect on Noteholders using the  accrual method of accounting. Cash
method Noteholders, however, may  be required to report  income with respect  to
Notes  issued with OID  in advance of  the receipt of  cash attributable to such
income. Each Noteholder should consult its own tax advisor regarding the  impact
of the OID rules if the Notes are issued with OID.
 
MARKET DISCOUNT
 
    If  a United States Holder that acquires a  Note has a tax basis in the Note
that is less than its "stated redemption  price at maturity," the amount of  the
difference will be treated as "market discount" for United States federal income
tax purposes, unless such difference is less than a specified DE MINIMIS amount.
Under  the market  discount rules of  the Code,  a United States  Holder will be
required to treat any principal payment on, and any gain on the sale,  exchange,
retirement  or other disposition of, a Note  as ordinary income to the extent of
any accrued market  discount that has  not previously been  included in  income.
Market  discount generally accrues  on a straight-line  basis over the remaining
term of a Note except that, at the election of the United States Holder,  market
discount may accrue on a constant yield basis. A United States Holder may not be
allowed  to deduct immediately all  or a portion of  the interest expense on any
indebtedness incurred or continued to purchase  or to carry such Note. A  United
States  Holder may elect  to include market  discount in income  currently as it
accrues (either on  a straight-line  basis or, if  the United  States Holder  so
elects, on a constant yield basis), in which case the interest deferral rule set
forth  in the preceding sentence will not  apply. Such an election will apply to
all bonds acquired by the United States Holder on or after the first day of  the
first  taxable year to which such election  applies and may be revoked only with
the consent of the IRS.
 
AMORTIZABLE BOND PREMIUM
 
    If a United States  Holder purchases a  Note for an  amount that is  greater
than  the amount  payable at  maturity, such holder  will be  considered to have
purchased such Note  with "amortizable  bond premium"  equal in  amount to  such
excess,  and  may  elect  (in accordance  with  applicable  Code  provisions) to
amortize such premium using a constant  yield method over the remaining term  of
the  Note (where such Note is not callable  prior to its maturity date). If such
Note may be called prior to maturity after the United States Holder has acquired
it, the  amount of  amortizable bond  premium is  determined with  reference  to
either  the amount payable on  maturity or, if it  results in a smaller premium,
attributable to the period through the  earlier call date with reference to  the
amount  payable on the earlier call date.  The amount amortized in any year will
be treated as a reduction of the United States Holder's interest income from the
Note in such year. A United States  Holder that elects to amortize bond  premium
must  reduce its tax basis in the Note by the amount of the premium amortized in
any year.  An election  to amortize  bond premium  applies to  all taxable  debt
obligations  then owned or  thereafter acquired by the  United States Holder and
may be revoked only with the consent of the IRS.
 
                                       62
<PAGE>
SALE, EXCHANGE OR RETIREMENT OF NOTES
 
    Upon the sale, exchange or retirement of a Note, a United States Holder will
recognize taxable  gain or  loss  equal to  the  difference between  the  amount
realized  on  the  sale,  exchange  or  retirement  (not  including  any  amount
attributable to  accrued but  unpaid interest)  and such  holder's adjusted  tax
basis  in the Note. A  United States Holder's adjusted tax  basis in a Note will
equal the cost of the Note to such holder, increased by the amount of any market
discount previously included in income by such holder with respect to such  Note
and reduced by any amortized bond premium and any principal payments received by
such holder.
 
    Subject to the discussion of market discount above, gain or loss realized on
the  sale, exchange or  retirement of a Note  by a United  States Holder will be
capital gain or loss, and will be long-term capital gain or loss if at the  time
of  the sale, exchange  or retirement the Note  has been held  for more than one
year. The excess  of net  long-term capital  gains over  net short-term  capital
losses  is taxed at a lower rate  than ordinary income for certain non-corporate
taxpayers, but not for corporate taxpayers. The distinction between capital gain
or loss and  ordinary income or  loss is  also relevant for  purposes of,  among
other things, limitations on the deductibility of capital losses.
 
TAX CONSEQUENCES TO UNITED STATES ALIEN HOLDERS
 
    Under  present United States federal income  and estate tax law, and subject
to the discussion below concerning backup withholding:
 
       (a) payments of principal of and interest on the Notes by the Trustee  or
           any  paying agent to  a beneficial owner  of a Note  that is a United
    States Alien Holder, as defined above, will not be subject to United  States
    federal  withholding tax, provided  that, in the case  of interest, (i) such
    holder does not own, actually or  constructively, 10 percent or more of  the
    total  combined  voting  power of  all  classes  of stock  of  the Depositor
    entitled to vote, (ii) such holder is not, for United States federal  income
    tax   purposes,  a  controlled  foreign  corporation  related,  directly  or
    indirectly, to the Depositor through  stock ownership, (iii) such holder  is
    not a bank receiving interest described in Section 881(c)(3)(A) of the Code,
    and  (iv)  the certification  requirements under  Section 871(h)  or Section
    881(c) of the  Code and Treasury  regulations thereunder (summarized  below)
    are met;
 
       (b) a  United States Alien Holder of a Note will not be subject to United
           States federal income tax on gain  realized on the sale, exchange  or
    other  disposition of such Note, unless (i) such holder is an individual who
    is present in the United States for 183 days or more in the taxable year  of
    sale,  exchange or other disposition, and certain conditions are met or (ii)
    such gain is  effectively connected  with the conduct  by such  holder of  a
    trade or business in the United States; and
 
       (c) a  Note held by an individual who is not a citizen or resident of the
           United States at the time of his death will not be subject to  United
    States  federal estate tax as a  result of such individual's death, provided
    that, at the time of such  individual's death, the individual does not  own,
    actually  or constructively, 10 percent or more of the total combined voting
    power of all classes of stock of the Depositor entitled to vote and payments
    with respect to such Note would  not have been effectively connected to  the
    conduct by such individual of a trade or business in the United States.
 
    Sections  871(h) and 881(c) of the  Code and Treasury Regulations thereunder
require that, in order to obtain the exemption from withholding tax described in
paragraph (a) above,  either (i)  the beneficial owner  of a  Note must  certify
under  penalties of perjury to the Trustee or  the paying agent, as the case may
be, that  such owner  is a  United States  Alien Holder  and must  provide  such
owner's  name and address, and United  States taxpayer identification number, if
any, or  (ii)  a  securities  clearing organization,  bank  or  other  financial
institution that holds customers' securities in the ordinary course of its trade
or  business (a  "Financial Institution")  and holds the  Note on  behalf of the
beneficial owner thereof must certify under penalties of perjury to the  Trustee
or the paying agent, as the case may be, that such certificate has been received
from the beneficial owner by it or by a Financial Institution between it and the
beneficial  owner and  must furnish the  payor with copy  thereof. A certificate
described in  this paragraph  is  effective only  with  respect to  payments  of
interest made to the certifying United States Alien
 
                                       63
<PAGE>
Holder  after issuance of the Notes in the calendar year of its issuance and the
two  immediately  succeeding  calendar  years.  Under  temporary  United  States
Treasury Regulations, such requirement will be fulfilled if the beneficial owner
of  a Note certifies on IRS  Form W-8, under penalties of  perjury, that it is a
United States Alien Holder and provides its name and address, and any  Financial
Institution holding the Note on behalf of the beneficial owner files a statement
with  the withholding agent to the effect  that it has received such a statement
from the  beneficial owner  (and furnishes  the withholding  agent with  a  copy
thereof).
 
    If  a United States Alien Holder of a Note is engaged in a trade or business
in the United States, and if interest on the Note, or gain realized on the sale,
exchange or other  disposition of the  Note, is effectively  connected with  the
conduct  of such  trade or  business, the  United States  Alien Holder, although
exempt from United States withholding tax, will generally be subject to  regular
United  States income tax on such  interest or gain in the  same manner as if it
were a  United  States Holder.  In  lieu of  the  certificate described  in  the
preceding paragraph, such a holder will be required to provide to the Trustee or
the paying agent, as the case may be, a properly executed IRS Form 4224 in order
to  claim an exemption from withholding tax.  In addition, if such United States
Alien Holder is a foreign corporation, it may be subject to a branch profits tax
equal to  30% (or  such lower  rate provided  by an  applicable treaty)  of  its
effectively  connected earnings  and profits  for the  taxable year,  subject to
certain adjustments. For purposes of the branch profits tax, interest on and any
gain recognized on the  sale, exchange or  other disposition of  a Note will  be
included  in the earnings and profits of such United States Alien Holder if such
interest or gain is effectively connected with the conduct by the United  States
Alien Holder of a trade or business in the United States.
 
BACKUP WITHHOLDING
 
    Under current United States federal income tax law, a 31% backup withholding
tax  requirement applies to certain payments of interest on, and the proceeds of
a sale, exchange or redemption of, the Notes.
 
    Backup withholding will generally not apply with respect to payments made to
certain exempt recipients such as corporations or other tax-exempt entities.  In
the  case of a non-corporate United States Holder, backup withholding will apply
only if such  holder (i)  fails to  furnish its  taxpayer identification  number
("TIN")  which, for  an individual,  would be  his social  security number, (ii)
furnishes an incorrect TIN, (iii) is notified  by the IRS that it has failed  to
report  properly  payments  of  interest and  dividends  or  (iv)  under certain
circumstances, fails to certify under penalties of perjury that it has furnished
a correct TIN and has not been notified by the IRS that it is subject to  backup
withholding for failure to report interest and dividend payments.
 
    In  the  case  of  a  United States  Alien  Holder,  under  current Treasury
Regulations, backup withholding will not apply  to payments made by the  Trustee
or  any paying agent thereof on a Note  if such holder has provided the required
certificate under penalties of perjury that it is not a United States Holder (as
defined above) or has otherwise established an exemption, provided in each  case
that  the Trustee or such paying agent, as the case may be, does not have actual
knowledge that the payee is a United States Holder.
 
    Under current Treasury  Regulations, if payments  on a Note  are made to  or
through a foreign office of a custodian, nominee or other agent acting on behalf
of a beneficial owner of a Note, such custodian, nominee or other agent will not
be required to apply backup withholding to such payments made to such beneficial
owner.
 
    Under  current Treasury Regulations, payments on the sale, exchange or other
disposition of a Note made to or through a foreign office of a broker  generally
will  not be subject  to backup withholding.  Payments to or  through the United
States office of a broker will be subject to backup withholding and  information
reporting  unless the holder certifies under penalties of perjury that it is not
a United States Holder  and that certain other  conditions are met or  otherwise
establishes an exemption.
 
                                       64
<PAGE>
    Holders of Notes should consult their tax advisors regarding the application
of  backup withholding  in their particular  situations, the  availability of an
exemption therefrom  and  the procedure  for  obtaining such  an  exemption,  if
available.  Any amounts withheld from payment under the backup withholding rules
will be allowed as a credit against a holder's United States federal income  tax
liability  and may entitle such  holder to a refund,  provided that the required
information is furnished to the IRS.
 
THE FOREGOING  DISCUSSION IS  FOR GENERAL  INFORMATION AND  IS NOT  TAX  ADVICE.
ACCORDINGLY,  EACH PROSPECTIVE NOTEHOLDER SHOULD CONSULT  ITS OWN TAX ADVISOR AS
TO THE PARTICULAR TAX CONSEQUENCES TO THE PROSPECTIVE NOTEHOLDER, INCLUDING  THE
APPLICABILITY  AND EFFECT OF ANY STATE, LOCAL OR FOREIGN INCOME TAX LAWS AND ANY
RECENT OR POSSIBLE CHANGES IN APPLICABLE TAX LAWS.
 
                                       65
<PAGE>
                              ERISA CONSIDERATIONS
 
    Section  406 of ERISA, and/or Section 4975 of the Code, prohibits a pension,
profit-sharing or other employee benefit plan, as well as individual  retirement
accounts  and certain types of Keogh Plans (each a "Benefit Plan") from engaging
in certain transactions with persons that are "parties in interest" under  ERISA
or  "disqualified persons" under the  Code with respect to  such Benefit Plan. A
violation of these "prohibited transaction" rules may result in an excise tax or
other penalties and liabilities under ERISA and the Code for such persons. Title
I of ERISA also  requires that fiduciaries  of a Benefit  Plan subject to  ERISA
make  investments that are prudent, diversified (except if prudent not to do so)
and in accordance with governing plan documents.
 
    Certain transactions  involving the  purchase, holding  or transfer  of  the
Notes  might be deemed to constitute prohibited transactions under ERISA and the
Code if assets of the  Owner Trust were deemed to  be assets of a Benefit  Plan.
Under  a regulation issued by  the United States Department  of Labor (the "Plan
Assets Regulation"), the  assets of  the Owner Trust  would be  treated as  plan
assets  of a Benefit  Plan for the  purposes of ERISA  and the Code  only if the
Benefit Plan acquires an "equity  interest" in the Owner  Trust and none of  the
exceptions  contained in  the Plan  Assets Regulation  is applicable.  An equity
interest is defined under the Plan Assets Regulation as an interest in an entity
other than an instrument which is treated as indebtedness under applicable local
law and which  has no substantial  equity features. The  Plan Assets  Regulation
also  provides that a beneficial interest in  a trust is an equity interest. The
Depositor believes  that the  Notes should  be treated  as indebtedness  without
substantial  equity features  for purposes  of the  Plan Assets  Regulation. The
Depositor also believes that the Notes do not constitute beneficial interests in
the Owner Trust  for purposes of  the Plan Assets  Regulation. However,  without
regard to whether the Notes are treated as an Equity Interest for such purposes,
the  acquisition or holding of Notes by or  on behalf of a Benefit Plan could be
considered to give  rise to  a prohibited transaction  if the  Owner Trust,  the
Owner Trustee or the Indenture Trustee, the owner of collateral, or any of their
respective affiliates is or becomes a party in interest or a disqualified person
with  respect to such  Benefit Plan. In  such case, certain  exemptions from the
prohibited transaction  rules could  be  applicable depending  on the  type  and
circumstances  of  the plan  fiduciary making  the decision  to acquire  a Note.
Included among  these exemptions  are:  Prohibited Transaction  Class  Exemption
("PTCE")  90-1,  regarding  investments  by  insurance  company  pooled separate
accounts; PTCE 91-38 regarding investments by bank collective investment  funds;
and PTCE 84-14, regarding transactions effected by "qualified professional asset
managers."
 
    Employee  benefit plans that  are governmental plans  (as defined in Section
3(32) of ERISA) and certain church plans (as defined in Section 3(33) of  ERISA)
are not subject to ERISA requirements.
 
    A plan fiduciary considering the purchase of any of the Notes should consult
its  tax and/or legal advisors  regarding whether the assets  of the Owner Trust
would be considered plan  assets, the possibility of  exemptive relief from  the
prohibited transaction rules and other issues and their potential consequences.
 
                              RATINGS OF THE NOTES
 
    It is a condition of issuance that each of Duff & Phelps, Fitch, Moody's and
S&P  (i) rate the  Class A Notes in  its highest rating  category, (ii) rate the
Class B Notes "                             ," "                              ,"
"                          " and "                          ," respectively, and
(iii) rate  the  Class  C  Notes "                                            ,"
"                                   ," "                                   " and
"                        ," respectively. The rating of the Notes will be  based
primarily  upon  the  Pledged  Revenues, the  Cash  Collateral  Account  and the
subordination provided by  (1) the  Class B  Notes, the  Class C  Notes and  the
Equity Certificates, in the case of the Class A Notes, (2) the Class C Notes and
the  Equity Certificates, in the  case of the Class B  Notes, and (3) the Equity
Certificates, in the case of the Class  C Notes. There is no assurance that  any
such  rating will not be lowered or withdrawn by the assigning Rating Agency if,
in its judgment, circumstances so
 
                                       66
<PAGE>
warrant. In the  event that a  rating or ratings  with respect to  the Notes  is
qualified,  reduced  or withdrawn,  no  person or  entity  will be  obligated to
provide  any  additional  credit  enhancement  with  respect  to  the  Notes  so
qualified, reduced or withdrawn.
 
    The  rating  of the  Notes should  be  evaluated independently  from similar
ratings on other types of securities. A  rating is not a recommendation to  buy,
sell  or hold the Notes,  inasmuch as such rating does  not comment as to market
price or  suitability  for  a  particular investor.  The  rating  of  the  Notes
addresses  the likelihood  of the  payment of principal  of and  interest on the
Notes pursuant to their terms.
 
                                USE OF PROCEEDS
 
    The proceeds from the offering and sale of the Notes and the issuance of the
Equity Certificates will be used by  the Depositor to acquire the Contracts  and
the  Originators' interests in the Equipment and  to pay expenses payable by the
Depositor  in  connection  with  the  issuance  of  the  Notes  and  the  Equity
Certificates.
 
                                       67
<PAGE>
                                  UNDERWRITING
 
    Subject  to  the  terms and  conditions  of the  United  States underwriting
agreement (the "U.S. Underwriting Agreement"), the underwriters named below (the
"U.S. Underwriters"), through their representatives,            and
(the  "U.S.  Representatives"),  have  severally  agreed  to  purchase  from the
Depositor the following respective Initial Principal Amount of Notes (the  "U.S.
Notes") at the initial public offering price less the underwriting discounts set
forth on the cover page   of this Prospectus:
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                     INITIAL          INITIAL          INITIAL
                                                                    PRINCIPAL        PRINCIPAL        PRINCIPAL
                                                                 AMOUNT OF CLASS  AMOUNT OF CLASS  AMOUNT OF CLASS
U.S. UNDERWRITERS                                                    A NOTES          B NOTES          C NOTES
- ---------------------------------------------------------------  ---------------  ---------------  ---------------
 
<S>                                                              <C>              <C>              <C>
                                                                 ---------------  ---------------  ---------------
    Total
                                                                 ---------------  ---------------  ---------------
                                                                 ---------------  ---------------  ---------------
</TABLE>
 
    The  U.S. Underwriting Agreement  provides that the  obligations of the U.S.
Underwriters are  subject to  certain  conditions precedent  and that  the  U.S.
Underwriters  will purchase all of the U.S.  Notes offered hereby if any of such
U.S. Notes are purchased.
 
    The Depositor has  been advised by  the U.S. Representatives  that the  U.S.
Underwriters propose to offer the U.S. Notes to the public at the initial public
offering  prices set forth on the cover  page of this Prospectus, and to certain
dealers at such price,  less a concession not  in excess of  $       per  $1,000
Initial  Principal Amount  of Notes. The  U.S. Underwriters may  allow, and such
dealers may reallow, a concession  not in excess of  $       per $1,000  Initial
Principal  Amount of  Notes to certain  other dealers. After  the initial public
offering, the offering price and other selling terms may be changed by the  U.S.
Representatives.
 
    This  Prospectus may be used by  underwriters and dealers in connection with
offers and sales of the Notes to persons located in the United Sates.
 
    The Depositor and  the Owner  Trustee (on behalf  of the  Owner Trust)  have
entered   into  an  underwriting   agreement  (the  "International  Underwriting
Agreement")  with   certain   managers  (the   "International   Managers,"   and
collectively  with  the  U.S. Underwriters,  the  "Underwriters")  through their
representatives, Nomura International, plc. and             (the  "International
Representatives"),  providing for the concurrent offer  and sale of an aggregate
of $                                   , $                                   and
$                           principal amount of Class A Notes, Class B Notes and
Class C  Notes,  respectively (the  "International  Notes") outside  the  United
States.  The offering price and aggregate underwriting discounts and commissions
per Note for the U.S. Notes and the International Notes are identical.
 
    To provide for the coordination  of their activities, the U.S.  Underwriters
and  the  International  Managers  have entered  into  an  Agreement  Among U.S.
Underwriters and International Managers  (the "Intersyndicate Agreement")  which
provides,  among other things, that the  U.S. Underwriters and the International
Managers may purchase  and sell  among each  other such  number of  Notes as  is
mutually  agreed  upon  among  the U.S.  Representatives  and  the International
Representatives and as approved by Nomura International plc and Goldman, Sachs &
Co., as Global Coordinators. To the extent there are
 
                                       68
<PAGE>
sales among the U.S. Underwriters and the International Managers pursuant to the
Intersyndicate Agreement and as approved by the Global Coordinators, the  number
of  U.S. Notes  initially available  for sale by  the U.S.  Underwriters and the
number of International Notes initially available for sale by the  International
Managers  may be more  or less than the  numbers appearing on  the cover page of
this Prospectus.  Except as  permitted by  the Intersyndicate  Agreement and  as
approved  by the Global Coordinators, the price of any Notes so sold will be the
respective initial public offering  price, less an amount  not greater than  the
selling concession.
 
    Pursuant to the Intersyndicate Agreement, as part of the distribution of the
Notes  and subject to  certain exceptions, (a) the  U.S. Underwriters will offer
and sell U.S. Notes, directly or indirectly,  only in the United States and  (b)
the  International Managers will offer and sell International Notes, directly or
indirectly, only outside the United States. For these purposes, an offer or sale
is considered to be made in country if it is made to any individual resident  in
such  country  or to  any corporation,  partnership, pension,  profit-sharing or
other  trust  or  other  entity  (including  any  such  entity  constituting  an
investment  advisor  acting  with  discretionary  authority)  whose  office most
directly involved with the purchase is located in such country. "United  States"
means  the United  States of America,  its territories, its  possessions and all
areas subject to its jurisdiction.
 
    Each U.S. Underwriter and International  Manager has represented and  agreed
that:  (i) it has not offered or sold and, prior to the completion of the period
of six months from the closing date, will not offer or sell any Notes to persons
in the United Kingdom except to  persons whose ordinary activities involve  them
in  acquiring, holding,  managing or disposing  of investments  (as principal or
agent) for the purposes of their businesses or otherwise in circumstances  which
have  not resulted and will not  result in an offer to  the public in the United
Kingdom within the meaning of the  Public Offers of Securities Regulations  1995
(the  "Regulations"); (ii) it  has complied and will  comply with all applicable
provisions of the Financial Services Act  1986 with respect to anything done  by
it  in relation to the Notes in, from or otherwise involving the United Kingdom;
and (iii) it has only issued or passed on and will only issue or pass on in  the
United  Kingdom any document received by it  in connection with the issue of the
Notes to a person who is of a  kind described in Article 11(3) of the  Financial
Services  Act 1986 (Investments Advertisements) (Exemptions)  Order 1995 or is a
person to whom such document may otherwise lawfully be issued or passed on.
 
    The U.S. Underwriting  Agreement contains covenants  of indemnity among  the
U.S. Underwriters and the Depositor against certain civil liabilities, including
liability under the United States Securities Act of 1933, as amended.
 
    Nomura  International plc  has provided  acquisition financing  and advisory
services to HoldCo. and MergerCo. in connection with the Merger and will,  after
the  Merger Consummation  Date, hold  warrants to  acquire an  indirect majority
interest in the common stock of TCC. See "The Merger."
 
    Application has  been  made  to  list the  Notes  on  the  Luxembourg  Stock
Exchange.
 
                                       69
<PAGE>
                                 LEGAL MATTERS
 
    Certain  legal matters with respect to the Notes will be passed upon for TCC
and its affiliates (including the Depositor) by Dorsey & Whitney LLP. Cadwalder,
Wickersham &  Taft  will  act  as  counsel to  the  U.S.  Underwriters  and  the
International Managers. The Indenture, the Transfer and Servicing Agreement, the
Trust  Agreement, the Transfer Agreement  and the Notes will  be governed by the
laws of the State of New York.
 
                             ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
 
    1. The issue of the Notes has been authorized pursuant to the Indenture  and
       a  resolution dated              ,  1996 of the Board of Directors of the
Depositor.
 
    2. An application has been  made to list the  Notes on the Luxembourg  Stock
       Exchange.  In connection  with such  application, a  legal notice  of the
issuance of the Notes and copies of the Indenture and a copy of the Registration
Statement will  be  deposited  with  the Chief  Registrar  of  the  District  of
Luxembourg  (Greffier en Chef  du Tribunal d'Arrondissement  a Luxembourg) where
such documents may be examined and copies obtained. It is expected that  listing
of   the  Notes   on  the   Luxembourg  Stock   Exchange  will   be  granted  on
                        , 1996,  subject only  to the  issue of  the Notes.  The
listing of the Notes will be canceled if such Notes are not issued.
 
    3. As  long  as  the  Notes  are  outstanding,  copies  of  the Registration
       Statement and the Indenture and any reports containing information on the
Owner Trust prepared by  the Servicer will  be available free  of charge at  the
offices  of the Indenture Trustee and                           , as the listing
agent in Luxembourg at the following address:                             ,  and
will  be  published  in  a  leading  newspaper  having  general  circulation  in
Luxembourg (which is expected to be Luxemburger Wort).
 
    4. There is no litigation, arbitration or administrative proceeding,  actual
       or pending, which relates to the Owner Trust and to which the Owner Trust
is  a party or of which the Owner Trust has been notified, or threatened that it
will be made  a party,  which is material  in the  context of the  issue of  the
Notes.
 
    5. Upon  issuance,  the Notes  will be  accepted  for deposit  and clearance
       through DTC, Euroclear and Cedel Bank, as applicable. The Common Code for
the Notes is                                    ;  the International  Securities
Identification  Number for the Notes is                          ; and the CUSIP
number for the Notes is                         .
 
                                       70
<PAGE>
                                    GLOSSARY
 
                                   [TO COME]
 
                                       71
<PAGE>
                                                                      APPENDIX A
 
                        GLOBAL CLEARANCE, SETTLEMENT AND
                          TAX DOCUMENTATION PROCEDURES
 
    Except in certain limited circumstances, the Notes will be available only in
book-entry  form (the  "Global Notes"). Investors  in the Global  Notes may hold
such Global Notes through  DTC or, if applicable,  Cedel Bank or Euroclear.  The
Global  Notes will be tradeable as  home-market instruments in both the European
and United States domestic markets. Initial settlement and all secondary  trades
will settle in same-day funds.
 
    Secondary  market  trading between  investors  holding Global  Notes through
CEDEL and Euroclear  will be conducted  in the ordinary  way in accordance  with
their  normal rules and operating procedures and in accordance with conventional
eurobond practice.
 
    Secondary market trading between investors holding Global Notes through  DTC
will  be conducted  according to the  rules and procedures  applicable to United
States corporate debt obligations.
 
    Secondary cross-market trading between Cedel Bank or Euroclear  participants
and    DTC    participants   holding    Notes    will   be    effected    on   a
delivery-against-payment basis through the respective depositaries of Cedel Bank
and Euroclear and as participants in DTC.
 
    Non-United States holders of Global Notes will be exempt from United  States
withholding  taxes,  provided that  such holders  meet certain  requirements and
deliver appropriate  United  States tax  documents  to the  securities  clearing
organizations or their participants.
 
INITIAL SETTLEMENT
 
    All  Global Notes will be held in book-entry form by DTC in the name of Cede
& Co.  as nominee  of DTC.  Investors' interests  in the  Global Notes  will  be
represented  through financial institutions acting on their behalf as direct and
indirect participants in DTC.  As a result, Cedel  Bank and Euroclear will  hold
positions on behalf of their participants through their respective depositaries,
which in turn will hold such positions in accounts as participants of DTC.
 
    Investors  electing to hold  their Global Notes through  DTC will follow the
settlement practices  applicable to  United States  corporate debt  obligations.
Investor  securities  custody  accounts  will be  credited  with  their holdings
against payment in same-day funds on the settlement date.
 
    Investors electing  to  hold  their  Global  Notes  through  Cedel  Bank  or
Euroclear   accounts  will  follow  the   settlement  procedures  applicable  to
conventional eurobonds, except that there  will be no temporary global  security
and  no "lock-up"  or restricted  period. Global Notes  will be  credited to the
securities custody accounts on the  settlement date against payment in  same-day
funds.
 
SECONDARY MARKET TRADING
 
    Because  the purchase determines  the place of delivery,  it is important to
establish at the time of the trade  where both the purchaser's and the  seller's
accounts  are located to ensure that settlement can be made on the desired value
date.
 
    TRADING BETWEEN  DTC PARTICIPANTS.   Secondary  market trading  between  DTC
participants  will be settled  using the procedures  applicable to United States
corporate debt issues in same-day funds.
 
    TRADING BETWEEN CEDEL BANK AND/OR EUROCLEAR PARTICIPANTS.  Secondary  market
trading  between Cedel Bank  participants and/or Euroclear  participants will be
settled using the  procedures applicable to  conventional eurobonds in  same-day
funds.
 
    TRADING  BETWEEN DTC  SELLER AND  CEDEL BANK  OR EUROCLEAR  PURCHASER.  When
Global Notes are to be transferred from the account of a DTC participant to  the
account  of a Cedel  Bank participant or a  Euroclear participant, the purchaser
will send instructions to Cedel Bank or Euroclear through a participant at least
one business day prior to settlement. Cedel Bank or Euroclear will instruct  the
respective
 
                                      A-1
<PAGE>
depositary  to receive  the Global Notes  against payment.  Payment will include
interest accrued on the Global Notes from and including the last coupon  payment
date  to and  excluding the settlement  date. Payment  will then be  made by the
respective depositary to the DTC  participant's account against delivery of  the
Global  Notes. After  settlement has  been completed,  the Global  Notes will be
credited to  the respective  clearing  system and  by  the clearing  system,  in
accordance  with  its  usual  procedures, to  the  Cedel  Bank  participant's or
Euroclear participant's account. The  Global Notes credit  will appear the  next
day  (European time) and the cash debit will be back-valued to, and the interest
on the  Global Notes  will  accrue from,  the value  date  (which would  be  the
preceding  day  when settlement  occurred  in New  York).  If settlement  is not
completed on the intended value date (i.e., the trade fails), the Cedel Bank  or
Euroclear cash debit will be valued instead as of the actual settlement date.
 
    Cedel  Bank  participants  and  Euroclear  participants  will  need  to make
available to  the respective  clearing systems  the funds  necessary to  process
same-day  funds settlement. The most direct means  of doing so is to preposition
funds for settlement, either from cash on  hand or existing lines of credit,  as
they  would for any  settlement occurring within Cedel  Bank or Euroclear. Under
this approach, they may take on credit exposure to Cedel Bank or Euroclear until
the Global Notes are credited to their accounts one day later.
 
    As an alternative, if Cedel Bank or Euroclear has extended a line of  credit
to  them, participants can elect not to  preposition funds and allow that credit
line to be drawn  upon to finance settlement.  Under this procedure, Cedel  Bank
participants  or  Euroclear  participants purchasing  Global  Notes  would incur
overdraft charges for  one day,  assuming they  cleared the  overdraft when  the
Global  Notes were credited  to their accounts. However,  interest on the Global
Notes would accrue from the value date. Therefore, in many cases the  investment
income  on the Global  Notes earned during the  one-day period may substantially
reduce or offset the amount of such overdraft charges, although this result will
depend on each participant's particular cost of funds.
 
    Since the settlement  is taking place  during New York  business hours,  DTC
participants  can employ their usual procedures  for sending Global Notes to the
respective depositary for the  benefit of Cedel  Bank participants or  Euroclear
participants.  The sale  proceeds will  be available  to the  DTC seller  on the
settlement date. Thus, to  the DTC participant  a cross-market transaction  will
settle no differently than a trade between two DTC participants.
 
    TRADING  BETWEEN CEDEL BANK OR  EUROCLEAR SELLER AND DTC  PURCHASER.  Due to
time-zone differences  in their  favor, Cedel  Bank participants  and  Euroclear
participants  may employ  their customary  procedures for  transactions in which
Global Notes are to  be transferred by the  respective clearing system,  through
the   respective  depositary,  to  a  DTC  participant.  The  seller  will  send
instructions to  Cedel Bank  or Euroclear  through a  participant at  least  one
business  day prior to  settlement. In this  case, Cedel Bank  or Euroclear will
instruct the respective depositary to deliver the Notes to the DTC participant's
account against payment.  Payment will  include interest accrued  on the  Global
Notes  from and  including the  last coupon  payment date  to and  excluding the
settlement date. The payment will then be reflected in the account of the  Cedel
Bank  participant or Euroclear participant the following day, and receipt of the
cash proceeds in the Cedel Bank participant's or Euroclear participant's account
would be back-valued to the value date  (which would be the preceding day,  when
settlement occurred in New York). Should the Cedel Bank participant or Euroclear
participant  have a line of credit with its respective clearing system and elect
to be in debit in anticipation of  receipt of the sale proceeds in its  account,
the  back-valuation  will extinguish  any overdraft  charges incurred  over that
one-day period. If settlement is not completed on the intended value date (i.e.,
the trade fails), receipt of  the cash proceeds in  the Cedel Bank or  Euroclear
participant's account would instead be valued as of the actual settlement date.
 
                                      A-2
<PAGE>
    Finally,  day traders that  use CEDEL or Euroclear  and that purchase Global
Notes from  DTC participants  for delivery  to CEDEL  participants or  Euroclear
participants  should note that these trades would automatically fail on the sale
side unless affirmative action were taken.  At least three techniques should  be
readily available to eliminate this potential problem:
 
    1. borrowing through CEDEL or Euroclear for one day (until the purchase side
       of  the day trade is  reflected in their CEDEL  or Euroclear accounts) in
       accordance with the clearing system's customary procedures;
 
    2. borrowing the Global Notes in the United States from a DTC participant no
       later than one day prior to settlement, which would give the Global Notes
       sufficient time to be  reflected in their CEDEL  or Euroclear account  in
       order to settle the sale side of the trade; or
 
    3. staggering  the value dates  for the buy  and sell sides  of the trade so
       that the value date for the purchase from the DTC participant is at least
       one day prior to the value date for the sale to the CEDEL participant  or
       Euroclear participant.
 
                        CERTAIN U.S. FEDERAL INCOME TAX
                           DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS
 
    A  holder of Global Notes holding  securities through CEDEL or Euroclear (or
through DTC if  the holder has  an address  outside the United  States) will  be
subject  to 30% United States withholding tax that generally applies to payments
of interest (including original interest discount) on registered debt issued  by
United  States Persons, unless (i) each clearing system, bank or other financial
institution that holds customers' securities in the ordinary course of its trade
or business in the chain of intermediaries between such beneficial owner and the
United  States  entity  required  to  withhold  tax  complies  with   applicable
certification requirements and (ii) such holder takes one of the following steps
to obtain an exemption or reduced tax rate:
 
    EXEMPTION  FOR NON-U.S. PERSON  (FORM W-8).   Non-United States Persons that
are beneficial owners can obtain a  complete exemption from the withholding  tax
by filing a signed Form W-8 (Certificate of Foreign Status).
 
    If  the information shown on Form W-8 changes,  a new Form W-8 must be filed
within 30 days of such change.
 
    EXEMPTION FOR  NON-U.S.  PERSONS  WITH EFFECTIVELY  CONNECTED  INCOME  (FORM
4224).  A non-United States Person, including a non-United States corporation or
bank  with a United States branch, for  which the interest income is effectively
connected with its  conduct of a  trade or  business in the  United States,  can
obtain an exemption from the withholding tax by filing Form 4224 (Exemption from
Withholding  of Tax on Income Effectively Connected  with the Conduct of a Trade
or Business in the United States).
 
    EXEMPTION OR REDUCED RATE FOR NON-U.S. PERSONS RESIDENT IN TREATY  COUNTRIES
(FORM 1001).  Non-United States Persons that are beneficial owners residing in a
country  that has a tax treaty with the United States can obtain an exemption or
reduced tax rate  (depending on the  terms of  the treaty) by  filing Form  1001
(Ownership,  Exemption or Reduced Rate Certificate). If the treaty provides only
for a reduced  rate, withholding tax  will be  imposed at that  rate unless  the
filer  alternatively files Form  W-8. Form 1001  may be filed  by the beneficial
owner or his agent.
 
    EXEMPTION FOR U.S. PERSONS (FORM W-9).   United States Persons can obtain  a
complete  exemption from the withholding tax by filing Form W-9 (Payer's Request
for Taxpayer Identification Number and Certification).
 
    U.S. FEDERAL INCOME TAX REPORTING PROCEDURE.   A holder of Global Notes  or,
in  the case of a Form 1001 or a Form 4224 filer, his agent, files by submitting
the appropriate form to the person through which he holds (the clearing  agency,
in  the case of persons  holding directly on the  books of the clearing agency).
Form S-8 and Form 1001 are effective  for three calendar years and Form 4224  is
effective for one calendar year.
 
                                      A-3
<PAGE>
    The  term "United  States Person"  means (i)  a citizen  or resident  of the
United States, (ii) a corporation or partnership organized in or under the  laws
of  the United States or any political subdivision thereof or (iii) an estate or
trust the  income of  which is  includible  in gross  income for  United  States
federal  income tax  purposes, regardless of  its source. This  summary does not
deal with all aspects of United  States federal income tax withholding that  may
be  relevant to foreign  holders of the  Global Notes. Investors  are advised to
consult their own tax advisors for specific tax advice concerning their  holding
and disposing of the Global Notes.
 
                                      A-4
<PAGE>
INFORMATION   CONTAINED  HEREIN  IS  SUBJECT   TO  COMPLETION  OR  AMENDMENT.  A
REGISTRATION STATEMENT  RELATING TO  THESE SECURITIES  HAS BEEN  FILED WITH  THE
SECURITIES  AND EXCHANGE  COMMISSION. THESE SECURITIES  MAY NOT BE  SOLD NOR MAY
OFFERS TO BUY BE ACCEPTED PRIOR  TO THE TIME THE REGISTRATION STATEMENT  BECOMES
EFFECTIVE.  THIS  PROSPECTUS  SHALL  NOT  CONSTITUTE AN  OFFER  TO  SELL  OR THE
SOLICITATION OF AN OFFER TO BUY NOR SHALL THERE BE ANY SALE OF THESE  SECURITIES
IN  ANY STATE IN WHICH SUCH OFFER,  SOLICITATION OR SALE WOULD BE UNLAWFUL PRIOR
TO REGISTRATION OR QUALIFICATION UNDER THE SECURITIES LAWS OF ANY SUCH STATE.
<PAGE>
PROSPECTUS
                   SUBJECT TO COMPLETION, DATED JULY 23, 1996
                                  $
       CAPITA EQUIPMENT RECEIVABLES TRUST 1996-1 RECEIVABLE-BACKED NOTES
 
$             % RECEIVABLE-BACKED NOTES, CLASS A, DUE                    ; ISSUE
                                  PRICE:     %
$             % RECEIVABLE-BACKED NOTES, CLASS B, DUE                    ; ISSUE
                                  PRICE:     %
$             % RECEIVABLE-BACKED NOTES, CLASS C, DUE                    ; ISSUE
                                  PRICE:     %
 
<TABLE>
<S>                                                             <C>
                 ANTIGUA FUNDING CORPORATION                                       AT&T CAPITAL CORPORATION
                          DEPOSITOR                                                        SERVICER
</TABLE>
 
    Capita Equipment Receivables Trust 1996-1 (the "Owner Trust") will be formed
pursuant to a Trust Agreement, dated as of [September 1], 1996, between  Antigua
Funding  Corporation (the "Depositor"), which is to be a wholly owned subsidiary
of AT&T Capital Corporation ("TCC"), and                                       ,
as  Owner  Trustee  (the  "Owner  Trustee").  The  Receivable-Backed  Notes (the
"Notes") will be issued by the Owner Trust pursuant to an Indenture, dated as of
[September 1], 1996, between the  Owner Trust and
            ,  as Indenture Trustee  (the "Indenture Trustee").  The property of
the Owner Trust (collectively, the "Trust Assets"), from the date of issuance of
the Notes (the "Closing Date") to the Merger Consummation Date, will consist  of
the  proceeds of the Notes and the  Equity Certificates and additional cash held
(and invested  in certain  Eligible  Investments) in  an Escrow  Account,  which
amounts  will be sufficient to redeem the  Notes at the Special Redemption Price
on the Special Redemption  Date if the  Merger is not  consummated on or  before
September    , 1996. The  cash in the Escrow Account  will be used on the Merger
Consummation Date to acquire the Contracts.  From and after the consummation  of
the Merger, the Trust Assets will consist of a pool of approximately
equipment  leases,  installment  sale  contracts,  promissory  notes,  loan  and
security agreements  and similar  types of  receivables (the  "Contracts"),  all
Scheduled Payments and Prepayments made by the obligors (the "Obligors") on such
Contracts  on  and after  the Cut-Off  Date,  the interest  of the  Depositor in
certain equipment related to  such Contracts (the  "Equipment"), and amounts  on
deposit  from time to time in the  Collection Account and certain other accounts
described herein. TCC  will service  the Contracts  pursuant to  a Transfer  and
Servicing  Agreement, expected to be dated as  of [September 1], 1996, among the
Depositor, TCC, the Indenture  Trustee and the Owner  Trust. Of the Notes  being
offered,  $           , $            and $           initial principal amount of
the Class A  Notes, Class B  Notes and  Class C Notes,  respectively, are  being
offered   initially  in  the   United  States  by   the  U.S.  Underwriters  and
$            , $            and  $            , respectively, are being  offered
initially  outside the United States by the International Managers. The Price to
Public and Underwriting Discount will be identical for both offerings.
 
    The Owner Trust will  also issue two classes  of certificates of  beneficial
interest,  the Equity Certificates and the  Equipment Certificate, which are not
being offered  hereby. The  Equipment Certificate  will represent  an  undivided
interest  in, and be payable solely from,  certain amounts derived from the sale
or other disposition of the Equipment  related to the Contracts that  constitute
Lease  Contracts upon expiration or  termination (including an early termination
or liquidation) of such Lease Contracts  and certain other amounts as  described
herein.  Amounts payable on the Equipment  Certificate will not be available for
payment of interest and principal on the  Notes. It is expected that the  Equity
Certificates  will  initially represent  the right  to  receive principal  in an
amount equal to  approximately 4% of  the Cut-Off Date  Contract Pool  Principal
Balance, together with interest thereon at    % per annum.
 
    The  Notes  and the  Equity Certificates  will be  payable solely  from, and
secured by,  the Amount  Available  on each  Payment  Date (which  will  consist
primarily  of the  Scheduled Payments due  under the  Contracts, certain amounts
received upon the  prepayment or  purchase of Contracts  or (to  the extent  not
payable  on  the Equipment  Certificate) liquidation  of the  related Equipment,
investment earnings on amounts deposited  in the Collection Account  established
pursuant  to the Indenture and amounts permitted to be withdrawn therefor from a
Cash Collateral  Account, in  each  case subject  to  prior application  to  pay
certain  fees  and expenses)  in  the order  of  priority described  herein. The
likelihood of payment of interest on each Class of Notes will be enhanced by the
application of the Amount Available to the payment of such interest prior to the
payment of principal on any of the Notes or the Equity Certificates, as well  as
by  the preferential right of the Holders of Notes of each such Class to receive
such interest (1) in the case of the Class A Notes, prior to the payment of  any
interest on the Class B Notes, the Class C Notes or the Equity Certificates, (2)
in  the case of the Class  B Notes, prior to the  payment of any interest on the
Class C Notes or  the Equity Certificates, and  (3) in the case  of the Class  C
Notes,  prior  to  the  payment  of any  interest  on  the  Equity Certificates.
Likewise, the likelihood of payment of principal on each Class of Notes will  be
enhanced by the preferential right of the Holders of Notes of each such Class to
receive  such principal, to the extent of  the Amount Available after payment of
interest on the Notes and the Equity Certificates as aforesaid, (i) in the  case
of  the Class  A Notes, prior  to the  payment of any  principal on  the Class B
Notes,  the  Class  C  Notes  or   (except  as  described  herein)  the   Equity
Certificates, (ii) in the case of the Class B Notes, prior to the payment of any
principal  on  the Class  C Notes  or  (except as  described herein)  the Equity
Certificates, and (iii) in the case of the Class C Note, prior to the payment of
any principal  on  the Equity  Certificates,  except as  described  herein.  See
"Description of the Notes."
 
    To  the extent the Amount Available  is sufficient therefor, interest at the
rate per annum noted above for  each of the Class A,  Class B and Class C  Notes
(the applicable "Interest Rate") will be paid to Holders of each Class of Notes,
and  principal will be paid on  the applicable Class of Notes, on  the    day of
each month  (or, if  such day  is not  a Business  Day, on  the next  succeeding
Business  Day), commencing                 ,  1996 (each, a "Payment Date"). The
Stated Maturity Date for each Class of Notes is as set forth above.
 
    The Notes are subject to  redemption as described herein under  "Description
of the Notes -- Special Redemption" and "-- Optional Purchase of Contracts."
 
    There  is  currently no  secondary  market for  the  Notes and  there  is no
assurance that one will develop. The  U.S. Underwriters expect, but will not  be
obligated, to make a market in the Notes in the United States. The International
Managers  expect,  but will  not be  obligated, to  make a  market in  the Notes
outside the United States.  There is no assurance  that either such market  will
develop, or if either such market does develop, that such market will continue.
 
    Each prospective purchaser of the Notes must comply with all applicable laws
and  regulations in any jurisdiction in which it purchases or sells the Notes or
possesses or distributes this Prospectus  and must obtain any consent,  approval
or  permission required by it for the purchase, offer or sale by it of the Notes
under the laws and regulations  in force in any  jurisdiction to which it  makes
such  purchase, offer or sale,  and neither the Owner  Trust nor any Underwriter
shall have any responsibility therefor.
 
    The distribution of this Prospectus  and the offer or  sale of Notes may  be
restricted  by law in certain jurisdictions.  Persons to whom possession of this
Prospectus and  any of  the Notes  may come  must inform  themselves about,  and
observe,  any such  restrictions. See  "Underwriting." In  particular, there are
restrictions on the distribution  of this Prospectus and  the offer and sale  of
the  Notes  in  the United  Kingdom  and Japan.  None  of the  Owner  Trust, the
Underwriters  or  any  of  their   respective  representatives  is  making   any
representation  to any offeree or purchaser  of the Notes regarding the legality
of or investment  therein by such  offeree or purchaser  under applicable  legal
investment or similar laws.
 
    For so long as the Notes are listed on the Luxembourg Stock Exchange and the
rules  of such exchange so require, the notices to Noteholders will be published
in a  leading  newspaper having  general  circulation in  Luxembourg  (which  is
expected  to be the Luxemburger Wort) and  will be made available at the offices
of the [Luxembourg Listing Agent]). See "Additional Information."
 
    It is a condition of  issuance of the Notes that  each of Standard &  Poor's
Ratings  Services, Moody's Investors Service, Inc.,  Duff & Phelps Credit Rating
Co. and Fitch Investors Service, L.P. (i) rate the Class A Notes in its  highest
rating category, (ii) rate the Class B Notes "       ," "       ," "       " and
"        ," respectively, and (iii) rate the Class C Notes "       ," "       ,"
"       " and "       ," respectively. See "Ratings of the Notes."
 
    FOR A DISCUSSION OF CERTAIN FACTORS RELATING TO THIS OFFERING, SEE "RISK
                          FACTORS" ON PAGE 18 HEREIN.
                                ----------------
 
    THE NOTES  WILL  REPRESENT OBLIGATIONS  OF  THE  OWNER TRUST  AND  WILL  NOT
REPRESENT  INTERESTS  IN OR  OBLIGATIONS  OF ANTIGUA  FUNDING  CORPORATION, AT&T
CAPITAL CORPORATION OR ANY OF THEIR RESPECTIVE AFFILIATES.
 
THESE SECURITIES HAVE  NOT BEEN APPROVED  OR DISAPPROVED BY  THE SECURITIES  AND
EXCHANGE COMMISSION OR ANY STATE SECURITIES COMMISSION, NOR HAS THE SECURITIES
  AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION OR ANY STATE SECURITIES COMMISSION PASSED UPON THE
    ACCURACY  OR ADEQUACY  OF THIS  PROSPECTUS. ANY  REPRESENTATION TO THE
      CONTRARY IS A CRIMINAL OFFENSE.
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                              PRICE TO PUBLIC (1)                UNDERWRITING DISCOUNT (2)
                                      ------------------------------------  ------------------------------------
<S>                                   <C>                                   <C>
Per Class A Note....................                   %                                     %
Per Class B Note....................                   %                                     %
Per Class C Note....................                   %                                     %
Total...............................                   $                                     $
 
<CAPTION>
                                        PROCEEDS TO THE DEPOSITOR (1)(3)
                                      ------------------------------------
<S>                                   <C>
Per Class A Note....................                   %
Per Class B Note....................                   %
Per Class C Note....................                   %
Total...............................                   $
</TABLE>
 
- ------------------------
(1) Plus accrued  interest,  if  any,  at the  applicable  Interest  Rate,  from
                  , 1996.
(2) The  Depositor has  agreed to  indemnify the  International Managers against
    certain liabilities, including liabilities under the Securities Act of 1933.
    See "Underwriting."
(3) Before  deducting  expenses  payable  by  the  Depositor,  estimated  to  be
    $           .
 
                              GLOBAL COORDINATORS:
NOMURA INTERNATIONAL                                        GOLDMAN, SACHS & CO.
 
    The  Notes are offered  by the International Managers  subject to prior sale
when, as and if issued to and accepted by the International Managers subject  to
approval  of certain legal matters by  counsel and certain other conditions. The
International Managers  reserve the  right to  withdraw, cancel  or modify  such
offer  and to reject orders in  whole or in part. It  is expected that the Notes
will be delivered in book-entry form on or about September __, 1996 through  the
facilities  of The  Depository Trust  Company, Cedel  Bank, societe  anonyme and
Morgan Guaranty Trust Company of New  York, Brussels Office, as operator of  the
Euroclear System, against payment therefor in immediately available funds.
 
        Application has been made to list the Notes on the Luxembourg Stock
                                   Exchange.
                            ------------------------
                              NOMURA INTERNATIONAL
                                  -----------
 
               THE DATE OF THIS PROSPECTUS IS SEPTEMBER   , 1996
<PAGE>
    IN CONNECTION WITH THIS OFFERING, THE U.S. UNDERWRITERS AND/OR INTERNATIONAL
MANAGERS  MAY OVER-ALLOT OR EFFECT TRANSACTIONS  WHICH STABILIZE OR MAINTAIN THE
MARKET PRICE OF THE NOTES AT LEVELS ABOVE THOSE WHICH MIGHT OTHERWISE PREVAIL IN
THE OPEN MARKET.  SUCH STABILIZING,  IF COMMENCED,  MAY BE  DISCONTINUED AT  ANY
TIME.
 
    The  Depositor has taken all reasonable  care to ensure that the information
stated herein  is  true  and  accurate  in all  material  respects  and  is  not
misleading  as of the date hereof and  that there are no material facts omission
of which would make the information contained herein misleading in any  material
respect. The Depositor accepts responsibility accordingly.
 
    No  dealer,  salesman  or  other  person has  been  authorized  to  give any
information or to make any representation not contained in this Prospectus  and,
if  given or made, such information or representation must not be relied upon as
having been authorized by the Depositor, the Servicer, the Owner Trust, the U.S.
Underwriters or the International Managers. This Prospectus does not  constitute
an  offer to sell  or a solicitation  of an offer  to buy any  of the securities
offered hereby in any jurisdiction to any person to whom it is unlawful to  make
such  offer or solicitation  in such jurisdiction. Neither  the delivery of this
Prospectus, nor any sale made hereunder, shall, under any circumstances,  create
any implication that the information herein is correct as of any time subsequent
to the date hereof.
 
    Until              , 1996  (90 days after the  date of this Prospectus), all
dealers effecting transactions  in the  Notes, whether or  not participating  in
this  distribution, may be required to deliver a Prospectus. This is in addition
to the obligation of dealers to deliver a Prospectus when acting as Underwriters
and with respect to their unsold allotments or subscriptions.
 
    Upon receipt of  a request  by an investor  who has  received an  electronic
Prospectus  from any Underwriter or a  request by such investor's representative
within the period during which there  is an obligation to deliver a  Prospectus,
such  Underwriter  will  promptly deliver,  or  cause to  be  delivered, without
charge, to such investor a paper copy of the Prospectus.
 
    The Notes may not be offered or sold  in the United Kingdom by means of  any
document  except in circumstances which do not constitute an offer to the public
within the meaning  of the  Public Offers  of Securities  Regulations 1995.  All
applicable  provisions of the Financial Services  Act 1986 must be complied with
in connection with anything done in relation to the Notes in, from or  otherwise
involving the United Kingdom. See "Underwriting."
 
    In  making  an  investment  decision,  investors  must  rely  on  their  own
examination of the Notes, including the merits and risks involved. The  contents
of  this Prospectus are  not to be  construed as legal,  business or tax advice.
Each prospective purchaser must  consult its own  accountant, legal advisor  and
other  advisors  as to  the  business, legal,  tax  and related  aspects  of the
purchase of the Notes.  As used herein,  references to "dollars"  or "$" are  to
United States dollars.
<PAGE>
                                  UNDERWRITING
 
    Subject  to  the  terms  and conditions  of  the  international underwriting
agreement (the "International Underwriting Agreement"), the managers named below
(the  "International   Managers"),  through   their  representative[s],   Nomura
International,  plc. [and                                 ]  (the "International
Representatives"), have  severally agreed  to purchase  from the  Depositor  the
following  respective Initial Certificate Balances  of Notes (the "International
Notes") at the initial public offering price less the underwriting discounts set
forth on the cover page of this Prospectus:
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                     INITIAL          INITIAL          INITIAL
                                                                    PRINCIPAL        PRINCIPAL        PRINCIPAL
                                                                 AMOUNT OF CLASS  AMOUNT OF CLASS  AMOUNT OF CLASS
INTERNATIONAL MANAGERS                                               A NOTES          B NOTES          C NOTES
- ---------------------------------------------------------------  ---------------  ---------------  ---------------
 
<S>                                                              <C>              <C>              <C>
                                                                 ---------------  ---------------  ---------------
      Total....................................................
                                                                 ---------------  ---------------  ---------------
                                                                 ---------------  ---------------  ---------------
</TABLE>
 
    The International Underwriting  Agreement provides that  the obligations  of
the  International Managers are subject to certain conditions precedent and that
the International Managers will purchase all of the International Notes  offered
hereby if any of such International Notes are purchased.
 
    The Depositor has been advised by the International Representatives that the
International Managers propose to offer the International Notes to the public at
the  initial  public  offering  prices  set forth  on  the  cover  page  of this
Prospectus, and  to certain  dealers at  such price,  less a  concession not  in
excess of $      per $1,000 Initial Principal Amount of Notes. The International
Managers  may allow, and such dealers may reallow, a concession not in excess of
$       per $1,000 Initial Principal Amount  of Notes to certain other  dealers.
After  the initial public  offering, the offering price  and other selling terms
may be changed by the International Representatives.
 
    This Prospectus may be used by  underwriters and dealers in connection  with
offers and sales of the Notes to persons located outside the United Sates.
 
    The Depositor and the Owner Trust (on behalf of the Trust) have entered into
an  underwriting  agreement  (the "U.S.  Underwriting  Agreement")  with certain
underwriters (the "U.S. Underwriters,"  and collectively with the  International
Managers,  the "Underwriters") through their  representatives,
       and (the "U.S. Representatives"), providing for the concurrent offer  and
sale  of an aggregate of $         , $         and $         principal amount of
Class A Notes, Class B Notes and Class C Notes, respectively (the "U.S.  Notes")
in  the United States.  The offering price  and aggregate underwriting discounts
and commissions per Offered Certificate for the U.S. Notes and the International
Notes are identical.
 
    To provide for the coordination  of their activities, the U.S.  Underwriters
and  the  International  Managers  have entered  into  an  Agreement  Among U.S.
Underwriters and International Managers  (the "Intersyndicate Agreement")  which
provides,   among   other   things,   that  the   U.S.   Underwriters   and  the
 
                                       65
<PAGE>
International Managers may  purchase and sell  among each other  such number  of
Notes  as  is  mutually  agreed  upon among  the  U.S.  Representatives  and the
International Representatives and  as approved by  Nomura International plc  and
Goldman,  Sachs &  Co., as  Global Coordinators. To  the extent  there are sales
among the  U.S. Underwriters  and  the International  Managers pursuant  to  the
Intersyndicate  Agreement and as approved by the Global Coordinators, the number
of U.S. Notes  initially available  for sale by  the U.S.  Underwriters and  the
number  of International Notes initially available for sale by the International
Managers may be more  or less than  the numbers appearing on  the cover page  of
this  Prospectus. Except  as permitted  by the  Intersyndicate Agreement  and as
approved by the Global Coordinators, the price of any Notes so sold will be  the
respective  initial public offering  price, less an amount  not greater than the
selling concession.
 
    Pursuant to the Intersyndicate Agreement, as part of the distribution of the
Notes and subject to  certain exceptions, (a) the  U.S. Underwriters will  offer
and  sell U.S. Notes, directly or indirectly,  only in the United States and (b)
the International Managers will offer and sell International Notes, directly  or
indirectly, only outside the United States. For these purposes, an offer or sale
is  considered to be made in a country  if it is made to any individual resident
in such country or to  any corporation, partnership, pension, profit-sharing  or
other  trust  or  other  entity  (including  any  such  entity  constituting  an
investment advisor  acting  with  discretionary  authority)  whose  office  most
directly  involved with the purchase is located in such country. "United States"
means the United  States of America,  its territories, its  possessions and  all
areas subject to its jurisdiction.
 
    Each [U.S. Underwriter and] International Manager has represented and agreed
that:  (i) it has not offered or sold and, prior to the completion of the period
of six months from the closing date, will not offer or sell any Notes to persons
in the United Kingdom except to  persons whose ordinary activities involve  them
in  acquiring, holding,  managing or disposing  of investments  (as principal or
agent) for the purposes of their businesses or otherwise in circumstances  which
have  not resulted and will not  result in an offer to  the public in the United
Kingdom within the meaning of the  Public Offers of Securities Regulations  1995
(the  "Regulations"); (ii) it  has complied and will  comply with all applicable
provisions of the Financial Services Act  1986 with respect to anything done  by
it  in relation to the Notes in, from or otherwise involving the United Kingdom;
and (iii) it has only issued or passed on and will only issue or pass on in  the
United  Kingdom any document received by it  in connection with the issue of the
Notes to a person who is of a  kind described in Article 11(3) of the  Financial
Services  Act 1986 (Investments Advertisements) (Exemptions)  Order 1995 or is a
person to whom such document may otherwise lawfully be issued or passed on.
 
    The International  Underwriting Agreement  contains covenants  of  indemnity
among  the  International  Managers  and  the  Depositor  against  certain civil
liabilities, including liability  under the  U. S.  Securities Act  of 1933,  as
amended.
 
    Nomura  International plc  has provided  acquisition financing  and advisory
services to HoldCo. and MergerCo. in connection with the Merger and will,  after
the  Merger Consummation  Date, hold  warrants to  acquire an  indirect majority
interest in the common stock of TCC. See "The Merger."
 
    Application has been made  to list the Notes  for trading on the  Luxembourg
Stock Exchange.
 
                                       66
<PAGE>
                                    PART II
                     INFORMATION NOT REQUIRED IN PROSPECTUS
 
ITEM 14. OTHER EXPENSES OF ISSUANCE AND DISTRIBUTION.
 
    The  following table  sets forth the  expenses to be  incurred in connection
with  the  offering  of  the  Notes,  other  than  underwriting  discounts   and
commissions, described in this Registration Statement:
 
<TABLE>
<S>                                                                      <C>
Securities and Exchange Commission Registration Fee....................  $   344.83
Printing and Engraving.................................................      *
Legal Fees and Expenses................................................      *
Blue Sky Filing and Counsel Fees.......................................      *
Accounting Fees and Expenses...........................................      *
Trustee Fees and Expenses..............................................      *
Rating Agencies' Fees..................................................      *
Miscellaneous Expenses.................................................      *
                                                                         ----------
    Total..............................................................  $   *
                                                                         ----------
                                                                         ----------
</TABLE>
 
- ------------------------
* To be supplied by amendment.
 
ITEM 15. INDEMNIFICATION OF DIRECTORS AND OFFICERS.
 
    Antigua  Funding  Corporation is  incorporated under  the laws  of Delaware.
Section 145 of  the Delaware General  Corporation Law provides  that a  Delaware
corporation  may indemnify  any persons,  including officers  and directors, who
are, or  are  threatened to  be  made, parties  to  any threatened,  pending  or
completed action, suit or proceeding, whether civil, criminal, administrative or
investigative  (other than an action by or  in the right of such corporation, by
reason of the fact that such person was an officer, director, employee or  agent
of  such corporation, or is or was serving at the request of such corporation as
a director, officer, employee  or agent of  another corporation or  enterprise).
The indemnity may include expenses (including attorneys' fees), judgments, fines
and  amounts paid in settlement actually  and reasonably incurred by such person
in connection with such action, suit or proceedings, provided such person  acted
in  good faith and in a manner he reasonably believed to be in or not opposed to
the  corporation's  best  interests  and,  for  criminal  proceedings,  had   no
reasonable cause to believe that his conduct was illegal. A Delaware corporation
may  identify officers  and directors  in an action  by or  in the  right of the
corporation under  the  same  conditions,  except  that  no  indemnification  is
permitted without judicial approval if the officer or director is adjudged to be
liable  to the corporation.  Where an officer  or director is  successful on the
merits or  otherwise  in  the defense  of  any  action referred  to  above,  the
corporation  must  indemnify  him against  the  expenses which  such  officer or
director actually and reasonably incurred.
 
    The Certificate of Incorporation and  Bylaws of Antigua Funding  Corporation
provide,   in  effect,  that,  subject   to  certain  limited  exceptions,  such
corporation will indemnify its officers and directors to the extent permitted by
the Delaware General Corporation Law.
 
ITEM 16. EXHIBITS.
 
    The Exhibits filed as part of this Registration Statement are:
 
<TABLE>
<C>        <C>        <S>
*     1.1         --  Form of Underwriting Agreement.
      3.1         --  Certificate of Incorporation of Depositor.
      3.2         --  By-Laws of Depositor.
*     4.1         --  Form of Transfer and Servicing Agreement.
*     4.2         --  Form of Indenture.
*     4.3         --  Form of Trust Agreement.
*     4.4         --  Form of Transfer Agreement.
*     5.1         --  Opinion and consent of Dorsey & Whitney LLP with respect to legality.
</TABLE>
 
                                      II-1
<PAGE>
<TABLE>
<C>        <C>        <S>
*     8.1         --  Opinion and consent of Dorsey & Whitney LLP with respect to tax matters.
*    23.1         --  Consent of Dorsey & Whitney LLP (included as part of Exhibit 5.1).
*    23.2         --  Consent of Dorsey & Whitney LLP (included as part of Exhibit 8.1).
*    24.1         --  Power of Attorney (included on page II-3).
*    25.1         --  Statement of eligibility of Indenture Trustee.
</TABLE>
 
- ------------------------
* To be filed by amendment
 
ITEM 17. UNDERTAKINGS.
 
    The  undersigned  registrant  hereby   undertakes  that,  for  purposes   of
determining  any liability under the Securities Act  of 1933, each filing of the
registrant's annual report  pursuant to section  13(a) or section  15(d) of  the
Securities  Exchange  Act of  1934  (and, where  applicable,  each filing  of an
employee  benefit  plan's  annual  report  pursuant  to  Section  15(d)  of  the
Securities  Exchange  Act of  1934)  that is  incorporated  by reference  in the
registration statement  shall  be deemed  to  be a  new  registration  statement
relating  to the securities offered therein, and the offering of such securities
at that time shall be deemed to be the initial bona fide offering thereof.
 
    Insofar as indemnification for liabilities arising under the Securities  Act
of  1933 may be permitted to directors, officers, and controlling persons of the
registrant pursuant to  the foregoing provisions,  or otherwise, the  registrant
has been advised that, in the opinion of the Securities and Exchange Commission,
such  indemnification is against public  policy as expressed in  the Act and is,
therefore, unenforceable. In the event that a claim for indemnification  against
such  liabilities (other than the payment by the registrant of expenses incurred
or paid by a director,  officer or controlling person  of the registrant in  the
successful  defense  of any  action,  suit or  proceeding)  is asserted  by such
director, officer or controlling person in connection with the securities  being
registered, the registrant will, unless in the opinion of its counsel the matter
has  been settled  by controlling  precedent, submit  to a  court of appropriate
jurisdiction the question whether such  indemnification by it is against  public
policy as expressed in the Act and will be governed by the final adjudication of
such issue.
 
    The undersigned registrant hereby undertakes:
 
       (1) For purposes of determining any liability under the Securities Act of
           1933,  the information omitted  from the form  of prospectus filed as
    part of this Registration Statement in reliance upon Rule 430A and contained
    in a form of prospectus filed  by the registrant pursuant to Rule  424(b)(1)
    or (4) or 497(h) under the Securities Act shall be deemed to be part of this
    Registration Statement as of the time it was declared effective.
 
       (2) For the purpose of determining any liability under the Securities Act
           of  1933,  each  post-effective  amendment that  contains  a  form of
    prospectus shall be deemed  to be a new  registration statement relating  to
    the  securities offered therein, and the offering of such securities at that
    time shall be deemed to be the initial bona fide offering thereof.
 
                                      II-2
<PAGE>
                                   SIGNATURES
 
    Pursuant  to the requirements of the  Securities Act of 1933, the registrant
certifies that it has  reasonable grounds to  believe that it  meets all of  the
requirements  for  filing on  Form  S-3 and  has  duly caused  this Registration
Statement to  be  signed  on  its behalf  by  the  undersigned,  thereunto  duly
authorized, in the City of New York, State of New York, on the 23rd day of July,
1996.
 
                                          ANTIGUA FUNDING CORPORATION
                                          By ___________/s/ GUY HANDS___________
                                                         Guy Hands
                                                         PRESIDENT
 
    Pursuant   to  the  requirements  of  the   Securities  Act  of  1933,  this
Registration  Statement  has  been  signed  by  the  following  persons  in  the
capacities indicated. Each person whose signature to this Registration Statement
appears  below hereby constitutes  and appoints James Elton  as his/her true and
lawful attorney-in-fact and agent, with full  power of substitution, to sign  on
his behalf individually and in the capacity stated below and to perform any acts
necessary  to  be  done  in  order to  file  all  amendments  and post-effective
amendments to  this  Registration Statement,  and  any and  all  instruments  or
documents  filed as part of or in connection with this Registration Statement or
the amendments  thereto and  each  of the  undersigned  does hereby  ratify  and
confirm  all that said attorney-in-fact and  agent, or his substitutes, shall do
or cause to be done by virtue hereof.
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                   SIGNATURE                                          TITLE                             DATE
- -----------------------------------------------  -----------------------------------------------  ----------------
<C>                                              <S>                                              <C>
                 /s/ GUY HANDS                   President (Principal Executive Officer) and         July 23, 1996
                   Guy Hands                     Director
                 /s/ JEFF NASH                   Vice President (Principal Financial and             July 23, 1996
                   Jeff Nash                     Accounting Officer) and Director
</TABLE>
 
                                      II-3
<PAGE>
                               INDEX TO EXHIBITS
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
 EXHIBITS    DESCRIPTION
- -----------  -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<C>          <S>                                                                                              <C>
     *  1.1  Form of Underwriting Agreement.
 
        3.1  Certificate of Incorporation of Depositor.
 
        3.2  By-laws of Depositor.
 
     *  4.1  Form of Transfer and Servicing Agreement.
 
     *  4.2  Form of Indenture.
 
     *  4.3  Form of Trust Agreement.
 
     *  4.4  Form of Transfer Agreement.
 
     *  5.1  Opinion and consent of Dorsey & Whitney LLP with respect to legality.
 
     *  8.1  Opinion and consent of Dorsey & Whitney LLP with respect to tax matters.
 
     * 23.1  Consent of Dorsey & Whitney LLP (included as part of Exhibit 5.1).
 
     * 23.2  Consent of Dorsey & Whitney LLP (included as part of Exhibit 8.1).
 
     * 24.1  Power of Attorney (included on page II-3).
 
     * 25.1  Statement of eligibility of Indenture Trustee.
</TABLE>
 
- ------------------------
 
*  To be filed by amendment

<PAGE>


                             CERTIFICATE OF INCORPORATION

                                          OF

                             ANTIGUA FUNDING CORPORATION



              Article I.  NAME.  The name of the Corporation is Antigua Funding
Corporation (the "Corporation").

              Article II.  REGISTERED OFFICE.  The address of the Corporation's
registered office in the State of Delaware is Corporation Trust Center, 1209
Orange Street in the City of Wilmington, County of New Castle.  The name of its
registered agent at such address is The Corporation Trust Company.

              Article III.  PURPOSE.  The nature of the business or purpose to
be conducted or promoted by the Corporation is to engage exclusively in the
following business and financial activities:

              (a)  to acquire from AT&T Capital Corporation and wholly owned
    subsidiaries thereof (collectively, "ATTC") and to hold, sell, transfer or
    pledge pools of lease, installment sale and loan contracts and the related
    equipment (the "Leases");

              (b)  to enter into any agreement providing for the sale, transfer
    or pledge of Leases to trusts (the "Trusts");

              (c)  to enter into any agreement relating to any Leases that
    provides for the administration, servicing and collection of amounts due on
    such Leases;

              (d)  to sell any class of asset-backed certificates or other
    securities issued by the Trusts;

              (e)  to engage in any lawful act or activity and to exercise any
    powers permitted to corporations organized under the General Corporation Law
    of the State of Delaware that are incidental to and necessary, suitable or 
    convenient for the accomplishment of the purposes specified in clauses (a) 
    through (d) above.

              Article IV.  DURATION.  The Corporation is to have perpetual
existence.

<PAGE>


              Article V.  NUMBER OF SHARES.  The aggregate number of shares of
all classes of capital stock that the Corporation shall have authority to issue
is one hundred (100) shares of Common Stock, par value of $0.01 per share.

              Article VI.  REPURCHASE OF SHARES.  The Corporation, through its
Board of Directors, shall have the right and power to repurchase any of its
outstanding stock at such price and upon such terms as may be agreed upon
between the Corporation and the selling stockholder or stockholders.

              Article VII.  INCORPORATOR.  The name and mailing address of the
incorporator is as follows:

              Name                Mailing Address
              ----                ---------------

         Deborah L. Vigdal        220 South Sixth Street
                                  Minneapolis, Minnesota  55402

              Article VIII.  NUMBER OF DIRECTORS; INITIAL DIRECTORS.  The
number of directors of the Corporation will not be less than two nor more than
seven.  The exact number of directors is to be fixed in the Bylaws.  The number
of directors constituting the initial Board of Directors is two, and the names
and addresses of the persons who are to serve as directors until the first
annual meeting of shareholders or until their respective successors are elected
and qualified are:

                   Name                     Address
                   ----                     -------

              Guy Hands                1 St. Martin's-le-Grand
                                       London EC1A 4NP
              Jeff Nash                1 St. Martin's-le-Grand
                                       London EC1A 4NP

The list above setting forth the names and addresses of the initial directors of
the Corporation does not include additional persons who may otherwise be elected
and qualified to serve as directors in accordance with the Bylaws.

              Article IX.  INDEPENDENT DIRECTORS.  At all times after October
1, 1996, at least one director of the Corporation must be an Independent
Director.  "Independent Director" means a director of the Corporation who may at
no time be, or have been, a director or officer of, be employed by, be retained
by, provide consulting services for or hold any beneficial economic interest in
the Corporation or any Affiliate.  "Affiliate" means any entity other than the
Corporation (i) which owns beneficially, directly or indirectly, 10% or more of
the outstanding shares of Common Stock of the Corporation, or (ii) of which 10%
or more of the outstanding shares of its Common Stock is owned beneficially,
directly or indirectly, by any entity


                                         -2-

<PAGE>

described in clause (i) above, or (iii) which is controlled by an entity
described in clause (i) above, as the term "control" is defined under Section
230.405 of the Rules and Regulations of the Securities and Exchange Commission,
17 C.F.R. Section 230.405.

              Article X.  DIRECTORS' POWERS.  With the consent in writing of
the Independent Director or the Independent Directors, as the case may be (as
that term is defined in Article IX), the directors shall have power to make and
to alter or amend the Bylaws, to fix the amount to be reserved as working
capital, and to authorize and cause to be executed, mortgages and liens without
limit as to the amount, upon the property and franchise of this Corporation or
to issue guarantees on behalf of the Corporation.

              With the consent in writing of the Independent Director or the
Independent Directors, as the case may be (as that term is defined in Article
IX), and pursuant to a vote of the holders of all of the capital stock issued
and outstanding, the directors shall have authority to dispose, in any manner,
of the whole property of this Corporation.

              The Bylaws shall determine whether and to what extent the
accounts and books of this Corporation, or any of them, shall be open to the
inspection of the stockholders; and no stockholder shall have any right of
inspecting any account, or book, or document of this Corporation, except as
conferred by law or the Bylaws or by resolution of the stockholders.

              The stockholders and directors shall have power to hold their
meetings and keep the books, documents and papers of the Corporation outside the
State of Delaware, at such places as may be from time to time designated by the
Bylaws or by resolution of the stockholders or directors, except as otherwise
required by the laws of Delaware.

              Article XI.  WRITTEN ACTION BY DIRECTORS.  An action required or
permitted to be taken at a meeting of the Board of Directors of the Corporation
may be taken by written action signed, or counterparts of a written action
signed, in the aggregate by all of the directors.

              Article XII.  RELIANCE ON BOOKS AND RECORDS, ETC.  A director
shall, in the performance of his duties, be fully protected in relying in good
faith upon the records of the Corporation and upon such information, opinions,
reports or statements presented to the Corporation by any of the Corporation's
officers or employees, or committees of the Board of Directors, or by any other
person as to matters the director reasonably believes are within such other
person's professional or expert competence and who has been selected with
reasonable care by or on behalf of the Corporation.


                                         -3-

<PAGE>

              Article XIII.  LIABILITY OF DIRECTORS.  To the fullest extent
permitted by the General Corporation Law of the State of Delaware as the same
exists or may hereafter be amended, a director of the Corporation shall not be
liable to the Corporation or its stockholders for monetary damages for a breach
of fiduciary duty as a director, except (i) for any breach of the director's
duty of loyalty to the Corporation or its stockholders, (ii) for acts or
omissions not in good faith or which involve intentional misconduct or a knowing
violation of law, (iii) under Section 174 of the Delaware General Corporation
Law or (iv) for any transaction from which the director derived an improper
personal benefit.  Any repeal or modification of this Article XIII shall not
adversely affect any right or protection of a director of the Corporation
existing at the time of such repeal or modification.

              Article XIV.  INTERNAL AFFAIRS.  The Corporation will conduct its
affairs in accordance with the following provisions:

              (a)  the Corporation will establish an office through which its
    business will be conducted, which office will be separate and apart from
    that of any Affiliate;

              (b)  the Corporation will maintain separate corporate records and
    books of account from those of any Affiliate;

              (c)  the Corporation's assets will not be commingled with those  
    of any other corporation; and

              (d)  The Corporation's Board of Directors will hold regular
    meetings, not less frequently than once every calendar quarter, to review
    the actions of the officers of the Corporation and to authorize and approve
    (i) all transactions outside the ordinary course of the Corporation's
    business that are incidental, necessary, suitable or convenient for the
    accomplishment of the purposes set forth in Article III, and (ii) such
    other transactions, agreements and actions of the Corporation as the Board
    of Directors deems appropriate in connection with its review and
    supervision of the Corporation's actions.

              Article XV.  MEETINGS OF STOCKHOLDERS.  Meetings of stockholders
shall be held at such place, within or without the State of Delaware, as may be
designated by or in the manner provided in the Bylaws or, if not so designated
or provided, at the registered office of the Corporation in the State of
Delaware.  Elections of directors need not be by ballot unless and except to the
extent that the Bylaws so provide.  The books of the Corporation may be kept
(subject to any provision contained in any applicable statute) outside the State
of Delaware at such place or places as may be designated from time to time by
the Board of Directors or in the Bylaws of the Corporation.



                                         -4-

<PAGE>

              Article XVI.  LIMITATIONS ON ACTIONS.  Notwithstanding any other
provision of this Certificate of Incorporation, the Bylaws or any provision of
law that otherwise so empowers the Corporation, the Corporation shall not,
without (i) the affirmative vote of 100% of the members of the Board of
Directors of the Corporation, including the affirmative vote of the Independent
Director or Independent Directors required by Article IX on or after the date on
which the Independent Director or Independent Directors required by such Article
IX have been appointed and qualified, and (ii) the affirmative vote of
stockholders holding at least two-thirds (2/3) of the total number of
outstanding shares of Common Stock of the Corporation:

              (a)  make an assignment for the benefit of creditors, file a
    petition in bankruptcy, petition or apply to any tribunal for the
    appointment of a custodian, receiver or any trustee for it or for a
    substantial part of its property, commence any proceeding under any
    bankruptcy, reorganization, arrangement, readjustment of debt, dissolution
    or liquidation law or statute of any jurisdiction, whether now or
    hereinafter in effect, consent or acquiesce in the filing of any such
    petition, application, proceeding or appointment of or taking possession by
    the custodian, receiver, liquidator, assignee, trustee, sequestrator (or
    other similar official) of the Corporation or any substantial part of its
    property, or admit its inability to pay its debts generally as they become
    due or authorize any of the foregoing to be done or taken on behalf of the
    Corporation; provided, that if there is not an Independent Director as
    required by Article IX of this Certificate of Incorporation then in office
    and acting, a vote upon any matter set forth in this paragraph (a) of this
    Article XVI may not be taken unless and until an Independent Director
    meeting the requirements of Article IX of this Certificate of Incorporation
    has been appointed and qualified;

              (b)  amend, alter, change or repeal any of the following articles
    of this Certificate of Incorporation:  Article III, Article IX, Article XIV
    or this Article XVI; or

              (c)  (i) engage in any business or activity other than as   
    authorized by Article III hereof, (ii) dissolve or liquidate, in whole or in
    part or (iii) consolidate with or merge into any other entity or convey, 
    transfer or lease its properties and assets substantially as an entirety to
    any entity, or permit any entity to merge into it or convey, transfer or
    lease its properties and assets substantially as an entirety to it.

              Article XVII.  AMENDMENT, ALTERATION OR REPEAL.  The Corporation
reserves the right to amend, alter, or repeal any other provision contained in
this Certificate of Incorporation in the manner now or hereafter prescribed by
statute,


                                         -5-

<PAGE>


 and all rights of stockholders herein are subject to this reservation;
PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that Article III, Article IX, Article XIV and Article XVI may
be amended only in accordance with Article XVI of this Certificate of
Incorporation.

              I, the undersigned, being the incorporator hereinbefore named,
for the purpose of forming a corporation pursuant to the General Corporation Law
of the State of Delaware, as amended, do make this certificate, hereby declaring
and certifying that this is my act and deed and that the facts herein stated are
true and that I have accordingly hereunto signed my signature this 17th day of
July, 1996.


                                       /s/ Deborah L. Vigdal
                             --------------------------------------------------
                             Deborah L. Vigdal
                             Incorporator


                                         -6-

<PAGE>

                                     BYLAWS

                                       OF

                           ANTIGUA FUNDING CORPORATION



                                   ARTICLE I.
                                   ----------

                            MEETINGS OF STOCKHOLDERS

          Section 1.     ANNUAL MEETINGS.  The annual meeting of the
stockholders for the election of directors and for the transaction of such other
business as may properly come before the meeting shall be held each year at such
time, on such day and at such place, within or without the State of Delaware as
shall be designated by the Board of Directors.

          Section 2.     SPECIAL MEETINGS.  A special meeting of the
stockholders for any purpose or purposes, unless otherwise prescribed by
statute, may be called at any time by the President or by the Secretary at the
request in writing of a majority of either the members of the Board of Directors
or the stockholders entitled to vote.

          Section 3.     TIME AND PLACE OF MEETINGS.  All meetings of the
stockholders shall be held at such times and places, within or without the State
of Delaware, as may from time to time be fixed by the Board of Directors or by
the President with respect to special meetings, or as shall be specified or
fixed in the respective notices or waivers of notice thereof.

          Section 4.     NOTICE OF MEETINGS.  Except as otherwise expressly
required by law, notice of each meeting of the stockholders shall be given, at
least fifteen (15) days in the case of an annual meeting, and ten (10) days in
the case of a special meeting, before the day on which the meeting is to be
held, to each stockholder of record entitled to vote at such meeting by mailing
such notice in a postage prepaid envelope addressed to the stockholder at the
stockholder's last postoffice address appearing on the stock records of the
Company.  Except as otherwise expressly required by law, no publication of any
notice of a meeting of the stockholders shall be required.  At special meetings
of stockholders no business other than that specified in the notice of the
meeting or germane thereto shall be transacted at such meeting.  Except as
otherwise expressly required by law, notice of any adjourned meeting of the
stockholders need not be given.  Notice of any meeting of stockholders may be
waived in writing by a majority of the stockholders entitled to vote thereat.

<PAGE>

          Section 5.     QUORUM.  At each meeting of the stockholders, except as
otherwise expressly required by law, stockholders holding a majority of the
shares of stock of the Company, issued and outstanding, and entitled to be voted
thereat, shall be present in person or by proxy to constitute a quorum for the
transaction of business.  In the absence of a quorum at any such meeting or any
adjournment or adjournments thereof, a majority in voting interest of those
present in person or by proxy and entitled to vote thereat, or in the absence
therefrom of all the stockholders, any officer entitled to preside at, or to act
as secretary of, such meeting may adjourn such meeting from time to time until
stockholders holding the amount of stock requisite for a quorum shall be present
or represented.  At any such adjourned meeting at which a quorum may be present
any business may be transacted which might have been transacted at the meeting
as originally called.

          Section 6.     ORGANIZATION.  At each meeting of the stockholders, one
of the following shall act as chairman of the meeting and preside thereat, in
the following order of precedence:


          (a)  the President;

          (b)  the Vice President designated by the Board of Directors to act as
               chairman of said meetings and to preside thereat;

          (c)  a stockholder of record of the Company who shall be chosen
               chairman of such meeting by a majority in voting interest of the
               stockholders present in person or by proxy and entitled to vote
               thereat.

The Secretary, or, if he shall be absent from such meeting, the person (who
shall be an Assistant Secretary, if an Assistant Secretary shall be present
thereat) whom the chairman of such meeting shall appoint, shall act as secretary
of such meeting and keep the minutes thereof.

          Section 7.     ORDER OF BUSINESS.  The order of business at each
meeting of the stockholders shall be determined by the chairman of such meeting,
but such order of business at any meeting at which a quorum is present may be
changed by the vote of a majority in voting interest of those present in person
or by proxy at such meeting and entitled to vote thereat, provided that at
special meetings of stockholders no business other than that specified in the
notice of the meeting or germane thereto shall be transacted.

          Section 8.     VOTING.  Each stockholder shall, at each meeting of the
stockholders, be entitled to one vote in person or by proxy for each share of
stock of the Company held by the stockholder and registered in the stockholder's
name on the books of the Company on the date fixed or determined pursuant to the

                                       -2-
<PAGE>

provisions of Section 5 of Article V of these Bylaws as the record date for the
determination of stockholders who shall be entitled to receive notice of and to
vote at such meeting.

          Shares of its own stock belonging to the Company shall not be voted
directly or indirectly.  Any vote on stock of the Company may be given at any
meeting of the stockholders by the stockholder entitled thereto in person or by
the stockholder's proxy appointed by an instrument in writing delivered to the
Secretary or an Assistant Secretary of the Company or to the secretary of the
meeting.  The attendance at any meeting of a stockholder who may theretofore
have given a proxy shall not have the effect of revoking the same unless the
stockholder shall in writing so notify the secretary of the meeting prior to the
voting of the proxy.  At all meetings of the stockholders all matters, except as
otherwise provided in these Bylaws or by law, shall be decided by the vote of a
majority in voting interest of the stockholders present in person or by proxy
and entitled to vote thereat, a quorum being present.  Subject to Article II,
Section 3, the vote at any meeting of the stockholders on any question need not
be by ballot, unless so directed by the chairman of the meeting.  On a vote by
ballot each ballot shall be signed by the stockholder voting, or by the
stockholder's proxy, if there be such proxy.

          Section 9.     LIST OF STOCKHOLDERS.  It shall be the duty of the
Secretary or other officer of the Company who shall have charge of its stock
ledger to prepare and make, at least ten (10) days before every meeting of the
stockholders, a complete list of the stockholders entitled to vote thereat,
arranged in alphabetical order and showing the address of each stockholder and
the number of shares registered in the name of each stockholder.  Such list
shall be open to the examination of any stockholder, for any purpose germane to
the meeting, during ordinary business hours, for a period of at least ten (10)
days prior to said meeting either at a place within the city where said meeting
is to be held and which place shall be specified in the notice of said meeting,
or, if not so specified, at the place where said meeting is to be held, and such
list shall be produced and kept at the time and place of said meeting during the
whole time thereof, and may be inspected by any stockholder who is present.  The
stock ledger shall be the only evidence as to who are the stockholders entitled
to examine the stock ledger or such list or the books of the Company, or to vote
in person or by proxy at any meeting of stockholders.

          Section 10.    INSPECTORS OR JUDGES.  The Board of Directors, in
advance of any meeting of stockholders, may appoint one or more inspectors or
judges to act at such meeting or any adjournment thereof.  If the inspectors or
judges shall not be so appointed, or if any of them shall fail to appear or act,
the chairman of such meeting shall appoint the inspectors or judges, or such
replacement or replacements therefor, as the case may be.  Such inspectors or
judges, before entering on the discharge of their duties, shall take and sign an
oath or affirmation faithfully to execute the duties of inspectors or judges at
meetings for which they are appointed.

                                       -3-
<PAGE>

At such meeting, the inspectors or judges shall receive and take in charge the
proxies and ballots and decide all questions touching the qualification of
voters and the validity of proxies and the acceptance or rejection of votes.  An
inspector or judge need not be a stockholder of the Company, and any officer of
the Company may be an inspector or judge on any question other than a vote for
or against his election to any position with the Company.

     Section 11.    ACTION WITHOUT A MEETING.  Except as otherwise provided by
law or by the Certificate of Incorporation of the Company, any action which may
be taken at any annual or special meeting of stockholders may be taken without a
meeting, without prior notice and without a vote, if a consent in writing,
setting forth the action so taken, shall be signed by the holders of outstanding
stock having not less than the minimum number of votes that would be necessary
to authorize or take such action at a meeting at which all shares entitled to
vote thereon were present and voted.  Prompt notice of the taking of the
corporate action without a meeting by less than unanimous written consent shall
be given to those stockholders who have not consented in writing.

                                   ARTICLE II.
                                   -----------

                               BOARD OF DIRECTORS

          Section 1.     GENERAL POWERS.  Subject to the provisions of the
Certificate of Incorporation of the Company, the business, properties and
affairs of the Company shall be managed by the Board of Directors, which,
without limiting the generality of the foregoing, shall have power to elect and
appoint officers of the Company, to appoint and direct agents, to grant general
or limited authority to officers, employees and agents of the Company, to make,
execute and deliver contracts and other instruments and documents in the name
and on behalf of the Company and over its seal, without specific authority in
each case, and, by resolution adopted by a majority of the whole Board of
Directors, to appoint committees of the Board of Directors, the membership of
which may consist of one or more directors, and which may, except as limited by
the Certificate of Incorporation of the Company, advise the Board of Directors
with respect to any matters relating to the conduct of the Company's business.
In addition, the Board of Directors may exercise all the powers of the Company
and do all lawful acts and things which are not reserved to the stockholders by
law or by the Certificate of Incorporation of the Company or by these Bylaws.

          Section 2.     NUMBER AND TERM.  Subject to the requirements of the
laws of the State of Delaware, the number of directors shall be no less than two
(2) and no more than seven (7).  Subject to Article IX of the Certificate of
Incorporation of the Company, each of the directors of the Company shall hold
office until the expiration of his term and until his successor shall be elected
or until their earlier


                                       -4-
<PAGE>

death, resignation, retirement, disqualification or removal.  Directors need not
be stockholders.

          Section 3.     ELECTION OF DIRECTORS.  Subject to the requirements of
Article IX of the Certificate of Incorporation of the Company, at each meeting
of the stockholders for the election of directors, at which a quorum is present,
the persons receiving the greatest number of votes, up to the number of
directors to be elected, shall be the directors.  Such election shall be by
ballot, provided, however, a nomination shall be accepted and votes cast for a
nominee shall be counted by the inspectors or judges of the election, only if
the Secretary of the Company has received at least 24 hours prior to the meeting
a statement over the signature of the nominee that he consents to being a
nominee and, if elected, intends to serve as a director.

          Section 4.     ORGANIZATION AND ORDER OF BUSINESS.  At each meeting of
the Board, one of the following shall act as chairman of the meeting and preside
thereat, in the following order of precedence:

          (a)  the President;

          (b)  any Vice President designated by the Board of Directors; or

          (c)  any director chosen by a majority of the directors present
               thereat.

The Secretary, or in case of his absence any Assistant Secretary (who shall be
present thereat) or the person (who shall be present thereat) whom the chairman
of such meeting shall appoint, shall act as secretary of such meeting and keep
the minutes thereof.  The order of business at each meeting of the Board of
Directors shall be determined by the chairman of such meeting.

          Section 5.     RESIGNATIONS.  Subject to the requirements of Article
IX of the Certificate of Incorporation of the Company, any director may resign
at any time by giving written notice of his resignation to the President or the
Secretary of the Company.  Any such resignation shall take effect at the time
specified therein, or, if the time when it shall become effective shall not be
specified therein, then it shall take effect when accepted by action of the
Board of Directors.  Except as aforesaid, the acceptance of such resignation
shall not be necessary to make it effective.

          Section 6.     VACANCIES, ETC.  Subject to the requirements of Article
IX of the Certificate of Incorporation of the Company, in case of any vacancy on
the Board, a director to fill the vacancy for the unexpired portion of the term
being filled may be elected by the holders of shares of stock of the Company
entitled to vote in respect thereof at an annual or special meeting of said
holders or by a majority of the directors of the Company then in office though
less than a quorum.

                                       -5-
<PAGE>

          Section 7.     REMOVAL.  Subject to the requirements of Article IX of
the Certificate of Incorporation of the Company, any director or directors may
be removed either for or without cause at any time by the affirmative vote of
the holders of a majority of all the shares of stock outstanding and entitled to
vote, at a special meeting of the stockholders called for that purpose, and the
vacancies thus created may be filled, at the meeting held for the purpose of
removal, by the affirmative vote of a majority in interest of the stockholders
entitled to vote.

          Section 8.     INCREASE OF NUMBER.  Subject to the requirements of
Article IX of the Certificate of Incorporation of the Company, the number of
directors may be increased by amendment of these Bylaws by the affirmative vote
of a majority of the directors, though less than a quorum, or, by the
affirmative vote of a majority in interest of the stockholders, at the annual
meeting or at a special meeting called for that purpose, and by like vote the
additional directors may be chosen at such meeting to hold office until the next
annual election and until their successors are elected and qualified.

          Section 9.     PLACE OF MEETING.  The Board may hold its meetings at
such place or places within or without the State of Delaware as the Board may
from time to time by resolution determine or as shall be specified or fixed in
the respective notices or waivers of notice thereof.

          Section 10.    FIRST MEETING.  As soon as practicable after each
annual election of directors, the Board shall meet for the purpose of
organization, the election of officers and the transaction of other business;
provided that a quorum of the whole Board of Directors and the director or
directors elected pursuant to Article IX of the Certificate of Incorporation of
the Company shall be present at such meeting.  Such meeting shall be held at the
time and place theretofore fixed by the Board for the next regular meeting of
the Board and no notice thereof need be given; provided, however, that the Board
may determine that such meeting shall be held at a different place and time but
notice thereof shall be given in the manner hereinafter provided for special
meetings of the Board.

          Section 11.    REGULAR MEETINGS.  Regular meetings of the Board shall
be held at such times as the Board shall from time to time determine.  Notices
of regular meetings need not be given.  If any day fixed for a regular meeting
shall be a legal holiday at the place where the meeting is to be held, then the
meeting which would otherwise be held on that day shall be postponed until the
same hour on the same day of the next succeeding week in which such day shall
not be a legal holiday at such place, or at such other time and place as the
Board shall determine in which event notice thereof shall be given.

                                       -6-
<PAGE>

          Section 12.    SPECIAL MEETINGS: NOTICE.  Special meetings of the
Board shall be held whenever called by the President or by one of the directors
at the time in office.  The Secretary shall give notice to each director as
hereinafter in this Section provided of each such special meeting, in which
shall be stated the time and place of such meeting.  Notice of each such meeting
shall be mailed to each director, addressed to the director at his residence or
usual place of business, at least ten (10) days before the day on which such
meeting is to be held, or shall be sent addressed to him at such place by
facsimile, telegraph, cable, wireless or other form of recorded communication,
or be delivered personally or by telephone not later than the day before the day
on which such meeting is to be held.  Notice of any meeting of the Board need
not, however, be given to any director, if waived by him in writing or by
facsimile, telegraph, cable, wireless or other form of recorded communication,
before, during or after such meeting, or if he shall be present at such meeting,
and any meeting of the Board shall be a legal meeting without any notice thereof
having been given if all the directors of the Company then in office shall be
present thereat.

          Section 13.    QUORUM AND MANNER OF ACTING.  Subject to the
requirements of the Certificate of Incorporation of the Company, and except as
otherwise provided in these Bylaws, the Certificate of Incorporation of the
Company, or by law, a majority of the members of the Board of Directors at the
time in office and the director or directors required by Article IX of the
Certificate of Incorporation of the Company shall be present in person at any
meeting of the Board of Directors in order to constitute a quorum for the
transaction of business at such meeting, and the affirmative vote of a majority
of directors present at any such meeting, at which a quorum is present, shall be
necessary for the adoption of any resolution or act of the Board.  In the
absence of a quorum, a majority of the Board of Directors may adjourn any
meeting, from time to time, until a quorum is present.  No notice of any
adjourned meeting need be given other than by announcement at the meeting that
is being adjourned.

          Section 14.    ACTION BY CONSENT.  Unless otherwise restricted by the
Certificate of Incorporation, any action required or permitted to be taken at
any meeting of the Board of Directors, or of any committee thereof, may be taken
without a meeting, if prior to such action a written consent thereto is signed
by all members of the Board or of such committee, as the case may be, and such
written consent is filed with the minutes of proceedings of the Board or
committee.

          Section 15.    COMMITTEES.  The Board of Directors may appoint
standing committees of its members.  Unless otherwise restricted by the
Certificate of Incorporation of the Company, such committees shall have such
powers as are conferred by the Bylaws or authorized by the Board of Directors.
The members of all standing committees shall be appointed annually at the first
meeting of the Board of Directors after the annual meeting of the stockholders
and shall continue as members until their successors are appointed, subject to
the power of the Board to

                                       -7-
<PAGE>

remove any member of a committee at any time and to appoint a successor.  At
least one Independent Director, as defined in Article IX of the Certificate of
Incorporation, shall be a member of each such committee.

          Section 16.    MEETING BY COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT.  Members of the
Board of Directors or any committee appointed by the Board of Directors, may
participate in a meeting of the Board of Directors or of such committee by means
of conference telephone or similar communications equipment by means of which
all persons participating in the meeting can hear each other, and such
participation in a meeting shall constitute presence in person at such meeting.

                                  ARTICLE III.
                                  ------------

                                    OFFICERS

          Section 1.     ELECTION.  APPOINTMENT.  TERM OF OFFICE.  The Executive
Officers of the Company shall consist of a President and such number of Vice
Presidents, if any, as the Board of Directors may determine from time to time.
There shall also be a Chief Financial Officer, who may also be the President or
a Vice President.  There shall also be a Secretary.

          Any officer may hold two or more offices, the duties of which can be
consistently performed by the same person.

          The Board of Directors may also appoint such other officers and agents
as it may deem necessary, who shall have such authority and perform such duties
as may be prescribed by the Board.

          All Executive Officers and other officers of the Company shall be
regularly elected or appointed by the majority vote of the whole Board of
Directors at its first meeting after the annual meeting of the stockholders and
shall hold office until the first meeting of the Board after the next annual
meeting of the stockholders, and until their successors are elected or
appointed.

          If additional officers are elected or appointed during the year, they
shall hold office until the next annual meeting of the Board of Directors at
which officers are regularly elected or appointed and until their successors are
elected or appointed.

          A vacancy in any office may be filled for the unexpired portion of the
term in the same manner as provided for election or appointment to such office.

          All officers and agents elected or appointed by the Board of Directors
shall be subject to removal at any time by the Board of Directors, either for or

                                       -8-
<PAGE>

without cause, by an affirmative vote of a majority of the entire Board of
Directors, at any regular meeting or at any special meeting.

          Section 2.     PRESIDENT.  The President shall be the chief executive
officer of the Company, and shall have the powers and perform the duties
incident to that position.  Subject to the Board of Directors, he shall be in
general and active charge of the entire business and all the affairs of the
Company and shall be its chief policy-making officer.  He shall have the primary
responsibility for continuing the separate status of the Company from any
affiliated corporation and the proper segregation of corporate assets from the
assets of third parties who may have possession of assets of the Company.  He
shall have general authority to execute bonds, deeds and contracts in the name
and on behalf of the Company and responsibility for the employment or
appointment of such employees, agents and officers (except officers to be
elected by the Board of Directors pursuant to Section 1 of this Article III) as
may be required to carry on the operations of the business, and he shall have
authority to fix the compensation of such agents and officers.  He shall have
such other powers and perform such other duties as may be prescribed by the
Board of Directors or provided herein.

          Section 3.     VICE PRESIDENTS.  Each Vice President shall have such
powers and duties as shall be prescribed by the Board of Directors at the time
of his election and such other powers and duties as may be assigned to him from
time to time by the President or the Board of Directors.

          Section 4.     CHIEF FINANCIAL OFFICER.  The Chief Financial Officer
shall be responsible for safeguarding the cash and securities of the Company and
the formulation of the investment and financial policies of the Company.  He
shall keep a full and accurate account of all monies received and paid on
account of the corporation and shall render a statement of his accounts whenever
the Board of Directors shall require.  He shall have such other powers and
duties as may be assigned to him by the President or the Board of Directors.  In
the absence of the Chief Financial Officer, the President or such person as
shall be designated by the President shall perform the duties of the Chief
Financial Officer.

          Section 5.     SECRETARY.  The Secretary shall attend to the giving of
notice of all meetings of stockholders and of the Board of Directors and
committees thereof, and as provided in Section 6 of Article I and Section 4 of
Article II, shall keep the minutes of all proceedings at meetings of the
stockholders and of the Board of Directors at which he is present, as well as of
all proceedings at all meetings of committees of the Board of Directors on which
he has served as secretary and, where some other person has served as secretary
thereto, the Secretary shall maintain custody of the minutes of such
proceedings.  He shall perform such other duties as may be assigned to him from
time to time by the President or the Board of Directors.

                                       -9-

<PAGE>

                                   ARTICLE IV.
                                   -----------

                 CONTRACTS, CHECKS, DRAFTS, BANK ACCOUNTS, ETC.

          Section 1.     EXECUTION OF DOCUMENTS BY OFFICERS.  All of the
Executive Officers of the Company elected as provided in Section 1 of Article
III of the Bylaws, shall have power to execute and deliver any deeds, contracts,
mortgages, bonds, debentures and other documents for and in the name of the
Company.

          All appointed officers shall have such powers with respect to
execution and delivery of deeds, contracts, mortgages, bonds, debentures and
other documents as may be assigned to them by the Board of Directors.

          Section 2.     DEPOSITS.  All funds of the Company not otherwise
employed shall be deposited from time to time to the credit of the Company or
otherwise as the Board of Directors, the President or the Chief Financial
Officer shall direct in such banks, trust companies or other depositories as the
Board of Directors may select or as may be selected by any officer or officers
or agent or agents of the Company to whom power in that respect shall have been
delegated by the Board of Directors.  For the purpose of deposit and for the
purpose of collection for the account of the Company, checks, drafts and other
orders for the payment of money which are payable to the order of the Company
may be endorsed, assigned and delivered by any officer or agent of the Company.


                                   ARTICLE V.

                           SHARES AND THEIR TRANSFER;

                              EXAMINATION OF BOOKS

          Section 1.     CERTIFICATES FOR STOCK.  Every holder of stock of the
Company shall be entitled to have a certificate or certificates, in such form as
the Board shall prescribe, certifying the number of shares of stock of the
Company owned by the stockholder.  The certificates representing shares of such
stock shall be numbered in the order in which they shall be issued and shall be
signed in the name of the Company by the person who was at the time of signing
the President or a Vice President and by the person who was at the time of
signing the Chief Financial Officer and its seal shall be affixed thereto;
provided, however, that the signature of such Executive Officer of the Company
and of such Chief Financial Officer and the seal of the Company may be
facsimile.  In case any officer or officers of the Company who shall have
signed, or whose facsimile signature or signatures shall have been used on, any
such certificate or certificates shall cease to be such officer or officers,
whether because of death, resignation or otherwise, before such

                                      -10-
<PAGE>

certificate or certificates shall have been delivered by the Company, such
certificate or certificates may nevertheless be adopted by the Company and be
issued and delivered as though the person or persons who signed such certificate
or certificates, or whose facsimile signature or signatures shall have been used
thereon, had not ceased to be such officer or officers.  A record shall be kept
of the respective names of the persons, firms or corporations owning the stock
represented by certificates for stock of the Company, the number of shares
represented by such certificates, respectively, and the respective dates
thereof, and in case of cancellation, the respective dates of cancellation.
Every certificate surrendered to the Company for exchange or transfer shall be
canceled and a new certificate or certificates shall not be issued in exchange
for any existing certificate until such existing certificate shall have been so
canceled except in cases provided for in Section 4 of this Article VI.

          Section 2.     TRANSFERS OF STOCK.  Transfers of shares of the stock
of the Company shall be made only on the books of the Company by the registered
holder thereof, or by his attorney thereunto authorized by power of attorney
duly executed and filed with the Secretary of the Company, or with a transfer
clerk or a transfer agent appointed as in Section 3 of this Article V provided,
and upon surrender of the certificate or certificates for such shares properly
endorsed and payment of all taxes thereon.  The person in whose name shares of
stock stand on the books of the Company shall be deemed the owner thereof for
all purposes as regards the Company.

          Section 3.     REGULATIONS.  The Board may make such rules and
regulations as it may deem expedient, not inconsistent with these Bylaws,
concerning the issue, transfer and registration of certificates for stock of the
Company.  The Board may appoint or authorize any officer or officers to appoint
one or more transfer clerks, any of whom may be employees of the Company, or one
or more transfer agents and one or more registrars, and may require all
certificates for stock to bear the signature or signatures of any of them;
provided, however, that the signature of any transfer clerk, transfer agent, or
registrar may be facsimile.  In case any transfer clerk, transfer agent or
registrar who has signed or whose facsimile signature has been placed upon a
certificate shall have ceased to be such transfer clerk, transfer agent, or
registrar before such certificate is issued, it may be issued by the Company
with the same effect as if he were such transfer clerk, transfer agent, or
registrar at the date of issue.

          Section 4.     LOST, STOLEN, DESTROYED AND MUTILATED CERTIFICATES.
The owner of any stock of the Company shall immediately notify the Company of
any loss, theft, destruction or mutilation of the certificate therefor, and the
Company may issue a new certificate of stock in the place of any certificate
theretofore issued by the Company, which is delivered to the Company, in the
case of a mutilated certificate, or alleged to have been lost, stolen or
destroyed, and the Board may, in its discretion, require the owner of the lost,
stolen or destroyed certificate, or his legal

                                      -11-
<PAGE>

representatives, to furnish evidence to the Company, which it shall in its
discretion determine is satisfactory, of the loss, theft or destruction of such
certificate and of the ownership thereof, and to give the Company a bond in such
sum, limited or unlimited, and in such form and with such surety or sureties, as
the Board shall in its uncontrolled discretion determine, to indemnify the
Company against any claim that may be made against it on account of the alleged
loss or destruction of any such certificate, or the issuance of such new
certificate.

          Section 5.     RECORD DATE.  To determine the stockholders entitled to
notice of or to vote at any meeting of stockholders or any adjournment thereof,
or entitled to receive payment of any dividend or other distribution or
allotment of any rights, or entitled to exercise any rights in respect of any
change, conversion or exchange of stock or for the purpose of any other lawful
action, the Board of Directors may fix, in advance, a record date, which shall
not be more than sixty (60) nor less than ten (10) days before the date of such
meeting, nor more than sixty (60) days prior to any other action.  If no record
date is fixed by the Board of Directors:

          (a)  The record date for determining stockholders entitled to notice
     of or to vote at a meeting of stockholders shall be at the close of
     business on the day next preceding the day on which notice is given.


          (b)  The record date for determining stockholders for any other
     purpose shall be at the close of business on the day on which the Board of
     Directors adopts the resolution relating thereto.  A determination of
     stockholders of record entitled to notice of or to vote at a meeting of
     stockholders shall apply to any adjournment of the meeting unless the Board
     of Directors shall fix a new record date for the adjourned meeting.

          Section 6.     EXAMINATION OF BOOKS BY STOCKHOLDERS.  The Board may
determine, from time to time, whether and to what extent, at what times and
places, and under what conditions and regulations, the accounts and books of the
Company, or any of them, shall be open to the inspection of the stockholders,
and no stockholder shall have any right to inspect any account or book or
document of the Company, except as conferred by the laws of the State of
Delaware or as authorized by resolution adopted by the Board or by the
stockholders of the Company entitled to vote in respect thereof.

<PAGE>

                                   ARTICLE VI.
                                   -----------

                                  OFFICES, ETC.

          Section 1.     REGISTERED OFFICE.  The registered office of the
Company in the State of Delaware shall be in the City of Wilmington, County of
New Castle, and the name of the resident agent in charge thereof shall be The
Corporation Trust Company.

          Section 2.     OTHER OFFICES.  The Company also may have an office or
offices other than said office in Section 1 of this Article VI at such place or
places, either within or without the State of Delaware, as provided in these
Bylaws or as the Board may from time to time appoint or as the business of the
Company may require.

          Section 3.     BOOKS AND RECORDS.  Except as otherwise required by
law, the Certificate of Incorporation or these Bylaws, the Company may keep the
books and records of the Company in such place or places within or without the
State of Delaware as the Board may from time to time by resolution determine or
the business of the Company may require.

                                  ARTICLE VII.
                                  ------------

                                    DIVIDENDS

          Subject to the provisions of law, of the Certificate of Incorporation
of the Company and of these Bylaws, the Board may declare and pay dividends upon
the shares of the stock of the Company either (a) out of its net assets in
excess of its capital as computed in accordance with the provisions of the laws
of the State of Delaware or (b) in case there shall be no such excess, out of
its net profits for the fiscal year then current and/or the preceding fiscal
year, whenever and in such amounts as, in the opinion of the Board, the
condition of the affairs of the Company shall render it advisable.  Dividends
upon the shares of stock of the Company may be declared at any regular meeting
of the Board of Directors and also at a special meeting, if notice of such
proposed action is given as provided in Section 10 of Article II of these
Bylaws.

                                  ARTICLE VIII.
                                  -------------

                                      SEAL

          The corporate seal, if one is adopted by the Board of Directors, shall
be in the form as prescribed by the Board of Directors and shall have inscribed
thereon the name of the Corporation and the words "Corporate Seal" and
"Incorporated 1996

                                      -13-
<PAGE>

Delaware."  If the Board of Directors adopts a corporate seal, such seal or a
facsimile thereof may be impressed or affixed or reproduced or other use made
thereof by the Secretary or any Assistant Secretary or any other officer
authorized by the Board.

                                   ARTICLE IX.
                                   -----------

                                   FISCAL YEAR

  The fiscal year of the Company shall end on the 31st day of December in each
year.

                                   ARTICLE X.
                                   ----------

                                WAIVER OF NOTICES

          Whenever any notice whatever is required to be given pursuant to these
Bylaws or by the Certificate of Incorporation of the Company or by the Delaware
General Corporation Law, a waiver thereof in writing, signed by the person or
persons entitled to said notice, or by facsimile, telegraph, cable, wireless or
other form of recorded communication, whether before or after the time stated
therein, or if such person shall attend a meeting, except when that person
attends such meeting for the express purpose of objections at the beginning of
the meeting, to the transaction of any business because the meeting is not
lawfully called or convened, shall be deemed equivalent thereto.  Neither the
business to be transacted at, nor the purpose of, any meeting need be specified
in any notice or written notice of waiver unless so required by the Certificate
of Incorporation of the Company or by these Bylaws.

                                   ARTICLE XI.
                                   -----------

                                 INDEMNIFICATION

          Section 1.     COVERAGE.  Each person who was or is made a party or is
threatened to be made a party to or is otherwise involved in any action, suit or
proceeding, whether civil, criminal, administrative or investigative
("proceeding"), by reason of the fact that he is or was a director, officer or
agent of the Company (which term shall include any predecessor corporation of
the Company) or is or was serving at the request of the Company as a director,
officer, employee or agent of another corporation or of a partnership, joint
venture, trust or other enterprise, including service with respect to employee
benefit plans ("indemnitee"), whether the basis of such proceeding is alleged
action in an official capacity as a director, officer, employee or agent or in
any other capacity while serving as a director, officer, employee or agent,
shall be indemnified and held harmless by the Company to the fullest extent
authorized by the Delaware General Corporation Law, as the same exists or may
hereafter be amended (but, in the case of any such amendment, only to

                                      -14-
<PAGE>

the extent that such amendment permits the Company to provide broader
indemnification rights than said law permitted the Company to provide prior to
such amendment), against all expenses, liability and loss (including attorneys'
fees, judgments, fines, ERISA excise taxes or penalties and amounts paid in
settlement) reasonably incurred or suffered by such indemnitee in connection
therewith and such indemnification shall continue as to an indemnitee who has
ceased to be a director, officer, employee or agent and shall inure to the
benefit of the indemnitee's heirs, executors and administrators; provided,
however, that, except as provided in Section 2 of this Article XI with respect
to proceedings to enforce rights to indemnification, the Company shall indemnify
any such indemnitee in connection with a proceeding (or part thereof) initiated
by such indemnitee only if such proceeding (or part thereof) was authorized by
the Board of Directors.  The right to indemnification conferred in this Article
XI shall be a contract right and shall include the right to be paid by the
Company the expenses incurred in defending any such proceeding in advance of its
final disposition; provided, however, that, if the Delaware General Corporation
Law requires, the payment of such expenses incurred by a director or officer in
his capacity as a director or officer (and not in any other capacity in which
service was or is rendered by such indemnitee, including, without limitation,
service to an employee benefit plan) shall be made in advance of the final
disposition of a proceeding only upon delivery to the Company of an undertaking,
by or on behalf of such indemnitee, to repay all amounts so advanced if it
ultimately be determined by final judicial decision from which there is no
further right to appeal that such indemnitee is not entitled to be indemnified
for such expenses under this Article XI or otherwise.  Expenses incurred by
agents in defending in any action, suit or proceeding, whether civil, criminal,
administrative or investigative may be paid by the Company upon such terms and
conditions, if any, as the Board of Directors deems appropriate.

          Section 2.     CLAIMS.  If a claim under Section 1 of this Article XI
is not paid in full by the Company within sixty (60) days after a written claim
has been received by the Company, except in the case of a claim for expenses
incurred in defending a proceeding in advance of its final disposition, in which
case the applicable period shall be twenty (20) days, the indemnitee may at any
time thereafter bring suit against the Company to recover the unpaid amount of
the claim.  If successful in whole or in part in any such suit or in a suit
brought by the Company to recover payments by the Company of expenses incurred
by an indemnitee in defending in his capacity as a director or officer, a 
proceeding in advance of its final disposition, the indemnitee shall be 
entitled to be paid also for the expense of prosecuting or defending such 
claim.  In any action brought by the indemnitee to enforce a right to 
indemnification hereunder (other than an action brought to enforce a claim 
for expenses incurred in defending any proceeding in advance of its final 
disposition where the required undertaking, if any, has been tendered to the 
Company) or by the Company to recover payments by the Company of expenses 
incurred by an indemnitee in defending, in his capacity as a director or

                                      -15-
<PAGE>

officer, a proceeding in advance of its final disposition, the burden of proving
that the indemnitee is not entitled to be indemnified under this Article XI or
otherwise shall be on the Company.  Neither the failure of the Company
(including the Board of Directors, independent legal counsel, or its
stockholders) to have made a determination prior to the commencement of such
action that indemnification of the indemnitee is proper in the circumstances
because the indemnitee has met the applicable standard of conduct set forth in
the Delaware General Corporation Law, nor an actual determination by the Company
(including the Board of Directors, independent legal counsel or its
stockholders) that the indemnitee has not met such applicable standard of
conduct, shall be a presumpton that the indemnitee has not met the applicable
standard of conduct, or in the case of such an action brought by the indemnitee,
be a defense to the action.

          Section 3.     RIGHTS NOT EXCLUSIVE.  The rights conferred on any
person by Sections 1 and 2 of this Article XI shall not be exclusive of any
other right which such person may have or hereafter acquire under any statute,
the Certificate of Incorporation of the Company, these Bylaws, and any
agreement, vote of stockholders or disinterested directors or otherwise.

          Section 4.     INSURANCE.  The Company may maintain insurance, at its
expense, to protect itself and any director, officer, employee or agent of the
Company or another corporation, partnership, joint venture, trust or other
enterprise against any expense, liability or loss, whether or not the Company
would have the power to indemnify such person against such expense, liability or
loss under the Delaware General Corporation Law.

          Section 5.     EMPLOYEES.  Persons who are not included as indemnitees
under Section 1 of this Article XI but are employees of the Company or any
subsidiary may be indemnified to the extent authorized at any time or from time
to time by the Board of Directors.

                                  ARTICLE XII.
                                  ------------

                                  MISCELLANEOUS

          Section 1.     AMENDMENTS.  These Bylaws, as they shall be at any
time, may be amended, altered or repealed by the Board of Directors at any
regular meeting of the Board of Directors or at any special meeting if the
proposed amendment, alteration or repeal is stated in the notice of the special
meeting; provided that in no event shall any amendment, alteration or repeal of
any Bylaw in any manner impair, or impair the intent of, or be inconsistent
with, the Certificate of Incorporation of the Company.

                                      -16-


© 2022 IncJournal is not affiliated with or endorsed by the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission